Home

SM_Si39-303 RXYQ5

Contents

1. 2909 08
2. KHRP26M22H Gas Side 1 0419 1 Insulation Liquid Side Insulation AE ia SS tek foes shot aaa x F SAA HL LER gt Soo m g 8 8 m m m i 2 130 2x 6o0 120 110 2x60 120 UA 380 1 0612 L 009 5 V3046 KHRP26M33H Gas Side eer 1 06 191 Insulation Liquid Side insulation 1 04 15 9 AAT Do dani ad e Loi fice MEM d aS gt M A I 3 E D BBE E gt gt E
3. gsoseode 38 1009 HOLINS 8015135 945 HDIR 05435 3unSS3ud HANIS 919 STA AVISU 91 L3NDYH YOM 99WY80 580 AYMD AMD WAOWG WHG MOTIAA MTA LA 3008 018 38 038 YOV18 Y18 580100 9 1V3H 1009 NY4 H LIMS 80123135 SIS 34414 1 0 HOISINH3HI 119 91 AVI3U 2113 9 Hd S 1405 1415 32 A30 80119231084 804 1102812 1UOHS 1 NOG 100390 N3HM L 92 612 3 H012313S 1V38 1000 8343238 3414 011 BOISINU3HI 19 91 52 AYI3U 2113NDVH 813 HOLIMS Z 150 ONY 89 150 ISN OL MOH 83402 XOG HOLIMS NO 13971 NOTINVD NOLLVH3dO OL 333 9 131110 9X3 1V3H WOISTNH3HI 189 910 51 AVI3U 2113N0VM 0 10 NOISSINSNVHL 1110 00010 24 14 NOISSINSNVHL 80001
4. Si39 303 Appendix RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B Solenoid Filter 1 Pressure 2 regulating Capillary valve ube Solenoid valve check Check capillary ix Electronic t e expansion valve Electronic m expansion valve High pressure Pressure High pressur regulating valve m i Pressure valve SE E regulating uc valve High pressure 1 switch HPS I Compressor Compressor Check valve Capillary tube 52 Low pressure sensor EN Filter gt N i NG p valve With service port on on site piping side 7 9mm flare connection 4D040338A General Information 135 Appendix Si39 303
5. E NS Press the on off button The operation lamp lights up and the system starts operation a Adjustment For programming temperature fan speed and air flow direction only for the remote controller BRC1A51 FXC FXF FXH FXK FXA follow the procedure shown below Press the temperature setting button and program the desired temperature Each time this button is pressed the temperature setting rises or lowers 1 C Set the temperature within the operation range m The temperature setting is impossible for fan only operation WX Press the fan speed control button and select the fan speed of your preference WX Press air flow direction adjust button Refer to the chapter Adjusting the air flow direction for details Stopping the system 4 Press the on off button once again The operation lamp goes off and the system stops operation W Do notturn off power immediately after the unit stops but wait for at least 5 minutes Explanation of heating operation Defrost operation m In heating operation freezing of the outdoor unit coil increases Heating capability decreases and the system goes into defrost operation W The indoor unit fan stops and the remote controller displays m After
6. 1 F2 1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F1 In case of RXYQ18 48MY1B 1 Cool heat selector 2 Outdoor unit P C board A1P 3 Take care of the polarity 4 Use the conductor of sheathed wire 2 wire nopolarity 5 Terminal board field supply 6 Indoor unit 1 2 3 1 1 Unit A Base unit 4 5 6 6 6 2 Unit B A B C F1 F2 F1 F2IQ1 02 Q1 a2 Q1 Q2 3 Unit C ejejsje e jej ols ejo 4 TO IN D UNIT j y 5 TO OUT D UNIT 6 TO MULTI UNIT 7 To cooler heater selector 7 8 indoor unit To oth t 7 9 9 To other systems 8 Heating cooling switching remote control X1M A B C F1 F2 F Fe a u ijr Quton 1 Heating cooling switching remote control cord Q 9 e when a heating cooling switch remote ae comtrol sold separately is connected 2 Secure to the lock plate using the included Q 9 clamping material 2 3 Wiring between the units Outdoor outdoor 4 Wiring between the units Indoor outdoor A 9 2 3 4 186 Ins
7. 20 21 22 Retain with accessory clamps 3 Electric wiring Wiring between units Retain to the electric box with the accessory clamps 1 When routing out the power ground wires from the right side When routing the remote control cord and inter unit wiring secure clearance of 50 mm or more from the power wiring Ensure that the power wiring does not contact any heated sections Retain to the back of the column support with the accessory clamps 2 When routing out the inter unit wirings from the opening for piping When routing out the power ground wires from the front When routing out the ground wires from the left side Grounding wire When wiring exercise sufficient caution not to detach the acoustic insulators from the compressor Retain to the back of the column support with the accessory clamps 2 Section A Section B Power supply Branch switch overcurrent breaker Earth leakage breaker Ground wire Unit A Unit B Unit C 184 Installation Manual Si39 303 Field Wiring N Caution Precautions when laying power wiring Use round pressure terminals for connections to the power terminal block When none are available follow the instructions below m Do not connect wiring of different thicknesses to the power terminal block Slack in the power wiring may cause abnormal heat m When connecting wiring which i
8. 197 T 8 Safety GO dUtIORIS oceano ndr cus Td infin Kao st Rim Up aa 199 What to Do Before OpGralloft suede ee e eant has catia pe eee 202 Remote Controller and Changeover Switch Name and Function of Each Switch and Display 203 WAITING 205 4 1 Never Do the Following 4 32 ee e Po hora 205 Operation i edited ecu t t 206 Operation Procedure uice ca e ia 207 6 1 Cooling Heating and Fan Only Operation 207 6 2 Program Dry Operation leitet usi dd ben epu rus Poet agas 209 6 3 Adjusting the Air Flow Direction Only for Double flow Multi flow Corner Ceiling suspended and Wall mounted 210 6 4 Programming Start and Stop of the System with Timer 211 6 5 Setting the Master Remote Controller 212 6 6 Precautions for group control system or two remote controller control system 213 Optimum Operation Pn Red e 214 Following Symptoms not Air Conditioner Troubles 215 8 1 The System does not operate 444 215 8 2 Cool
9. rc Circ to indoor unit 1 J to indoor unit hy Oil collects to the outdoor unit C when the system stops Lh Change as shown in the figure below Rising height 200 mm or more crit to indoor unit to indoor unit 3 If the piping length between the outdoor unit connecting pipe kits or between the outdoor units exceeds 2 m create a rise of 200 mm or more in the gas line within a length of 2 m from the kit If 2 m or less Piping between outdoor units to indoor unit 5 circ 2m or less If 2 m or more Rising height Piping between 200 mm or more outdoor units gt morless 2 Rising height Rising height Piping between 200 mm or more 200 mm or more outdoor units to indoor unit 2m or less 2m or less 17
10. ein 3 1 8 Combination of Outdoor 5 1 4 E 6 2 Points to Bear in Mind at the System 8 2 1 Points Relating to the Performance of the Air Conditioning Units 8 2 2 The Installation is of Vital Importance 9 2 3 Striking a Balance between System Installation and General Construction Work Comprehensive Flow Chart 10 2 4 Points to Bear in Mind when Preparing the Contract Drawings 11 Installati n 14 3 1 Step by Step Installation 14 3 2 Work Involved in Individual Operations and Points to be Borne in 1 15 4 Test Operati RE cc 62 4 1 Procedure and 62 4 2 Operation When Power is Turned 65 4 3 Outdoor Unit PC Board Layoutl 66 4 4 Field Setting M TREE m TE 67 5 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks iscritte 102 5 1 Caution for Refrigerant 102 6 Hand Over to Customer E D dS RU eee 105 6 1 Operational Eso E m 105 T 00 10 d S 106 7 1 Oper
11. tdoor nit OQ s Smallest Second Indoor nit room smallest room Calculate the refrigerant density using the results of the calculations in Step 1 and 2 above Total volume of refrigerant in the refrigerant system Size of the smallest room in which there is an indoor unit installed lt Dangerous concentration kg m in the case of R407C 0 35kg m R410A 0 44kg m If the result of the above calculation exceeds the dangerous concentration level then make similar calculations for the second then third smallest room and so on until the result falls short of the concentration level Installation Manual 195 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Si39 303 Step 4 Dealing with situations where the result exceeds the dangerous concentration level Where the installation of a facility results in a concentration in excess of the dangerous concentration level then it may be necessary to revise the system design to dome extent or else take one of the following courses of action Action 1 Making openings which will allow the air to flow freely into the room Make openings above and below the door which are each equivalent in size to 0 15 or more of the floor area or make a doorless opening Action 2 Fit a mechanical ventilator linked to a gas leak detection alarm device 11 Action 2 Gas Indoor nit leak detectio
12. 31 OoN OFF Upper position ON zm lower position OFF The shaded part shows knob V2724 92 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 2 3 Setting of Low Noise Operation and Demand Operation Setting of Low Noise Operation By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external control adapter optional you can lower operating noise by 2 3 dB A When the low noise operation is carried out by external instructions with the use of the outdoor unit external control adapter 1 Set External low noise Demand YES NO setting to External low noise Demand YES Set by Setting Mode 2 2 Set External low noise level setting on the outdoor unit PC board as the need arises Lower noise operation can be carried out by Mode 2 than by Mode 1 and by Mode 3 than by Mode 2 3 Set Capacity precedence setting on the outdoor unit PC board as the need arises If set to ON when air conditioning load gets higher the low noise instructions are neglected to switch to normal operation Set by Setting Mode 2 B When the low noise operation is carried out automatically at night The outdoor unit external control adapter is not required 1 Set Night time low noise setting on the outdoor unit PC board Set by Setting Mode 2 Lower noise operation can be carried out by Mode 2 than by Mode 1 and b
13. 102 Operational 105 Program Dry Operation 209 How these installation problems affect Programming Start and Stop of the System an 4 44422222222 9 WII TIM OL u eric Loi eer etes 211 How to select the refnet header 114 proper distances away from stereo equipment How to select the refnet 113 personal computers etc 56 162 R Indoor Unit Remote Controller 90 REFNET 127 Inspecting and Handling the Unit 58 164 REFNET 444 2 222 128 Installation of Gas Side Pipes 122 REFNET Joint 126 Installation of Indoor Unit REFNET joilit 128 Ceiling mounted cassette type FXCQ63M 16 Refrigerant Cylinders 224 Operational 16 Refrigerant 194 Posllioiibpu y t tide Pme 16 Refrigerant oil Air 228 Installation of liquid side pipes and oil pipe 123 Refrigerant Pipe Flushing installation of multiple outdoor units
14. 4 5 Indoor units 1 8 Maximum allowable length Between outdoor and indoor units Actual pipe length Pipe length between outdoor and indoor units lt 150m Example unit 8 a b c d e f g p lt 150m Example unit 6 a b h lt 150m unit 8 a i k lt 150m Example unit 8 a 1 150m Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outdoor and indoor units lt 175m assume equivalent pipe length of refnet joint to be 0 5m that of refnet header to be 1m calculation purposes Total extension length Total piping length from outdoor unit to all indoor units lt 300m Between outdoor branch and indoor unit Only for RXYQ18 or more Actual pipe length Piping length from outdoor branch to outdoor unit 10m Approximately length max 13m Allowable height length Between outdoor and indoor units Between indoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units H1 lt 50m Difference in height between adjacent indoor units H2 x 15m Max 40m if the outdoor unit is below Outdoor unit r 10m Approximately length max 13m Between outdoor and outdoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor unit main and outdoor unit sub H3 lt 5m s 10m Approximately length max 13m
15. VLO42 1 When in the normal mode push the button for 4 seconds or more and operation then enters the field set mode 2 Select the desired mode No with the button 3 During group control and you want to set by each individual indoor unit when mode No 20 21 22 23 25 has been selected push the time mode button and select the indoor unit No to be set Note This operation is not required when setting as a group Push the 4 button and select the first code No Push the button and select the second code No Push the timer button one time and define the currently set contents Push the button to return to the normal mode When setting the filter sign time to Filter Dirtiness High in all group unit setting set the Mode No to 10 Mode setting No to 0 and setting position No to 02 General Information 67 Test Operation Si39 303 4 4 1 2 Wireless Remote Controller Indoor Unit BRC7C type MODE NO FIELD SET MODE SECOND CODE NO FIRST CODE NO V2770 1 When in the normal mode push the 5 button for 4 seconds or more and operation then enters the field set mode Select the desired mode No with the button Pushing the button select the first code No Pushing the button select the second code No Push the timer y button and check the settings Push the 5 button to return to
16. 183 8 Befor ODO MORD UC DERE 191 8 1 Checks Before Initial 191 8 2 TES PU 192 9 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks 194 9 1 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks 194 Applicable models RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ28MY1B RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ30MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ32MY1B RXYQ12MY1B RXYQ34MY1B RXYQ14MY1B RXYQ36MY1B RXYQ16MY1B RXYQ38MY1B RXYQ18MY1B RXYQ40MY1B RXYQ20MY1B RXYQ42MY1B RXYQ22MY1B RXYQ44MY1B RXYQ24MY1B RXYQ46MY1B RXYQ26MY1B RXYQ48MY1B Installation Manual 153 Si39 303 N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution N Caution Read this manual attentively before starting up the unit Do not throw it away Keep it in your files for future reference Improper installation or attachment of equipment or accessories could result in electric shock short circuit leaks fire or other damage to the equipment Be sure only to use accessories made by Daikin which are specifically designed for use with the equipment and have them installed by a professional If unsure of installation procedures or use always contact your Daikin dealer for advice and information The refrigerant R410A requires strict cautions for keeping the system clean dry and tight A Clean and dry Foreign materials includi
17. 19 Electric wiring work 48 Pinching method toten toon prenne 19 multiple drain 47 Taping iussione negetur 19 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type FXKQ M Cracks develop in field pipes due to thermal multiple drain rss 45 expansion and contraction 149 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FXCQ M Double flow D DRAIN RAISING 41 Dealing with situations where the result exceeds the drainage OWS aet repe crat 41 dangerous concentration level 104 ELECTRIC WIRING WORK 42 Degree 32 Insulate the drain hose inside the building 41 Drain pipe trap shape defective 146 multiple drain 41 Drain Pipe Work Indoor Rig drain piping 40 Drain Pipe Gradient and Support 38 water level of the drain pan 42 Drain Trap ama ua er na eee 38 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FXFQ M Multi flow Grouped Drain Piping 39 Drain Piping 45 Operational 38 Drain raising piping 43 Use of an Auxiliary Drain Hose Flexible 39 Dr
18. 211 213 7 Optimum Operation RR ER 214 8 Following Symptoms are not Air Conditioner Troubles 215 8 1 The System does not operate 215 8 2 Cool Heat cannot be Changed 2 215 8 3 Fan Operation is Possible but Cooling and Heating do not Work 215 8 4 The Fan Strength does not Correspond to the Setting 215 8 5 The Fan Direction does not Correspond to the Setting 215 8 6 White Mist comes out of a Unit 216 8 7 Noise of Air 216 8 8 Dust comes out of the etra et Hte peus 216 8 9 The Units can Give off 216 8 10 The Outdoor Unit Fan does not 216 8 11 The Display Shows 88 rer e repeat ean 217 8 12 The Compressor in the Outdoor Unit does not Stop after a Short Heating 217 8 13 The Inside of an Outdoor Unit is Warm even when the Unit has stopped 217 9 Troubleshooting 218 Operation Manual 197 Si39 303 Thank you for purchasing this Daikin air conditioner Carefully read this operati
19. ane sellers 180 Additional Charge of Refrigerant 36 Filter Sign Setting 72 Additional refrigerant charge 178 Flange 27 Air Tight Test 29 Flare 24 Allowable Piping 110 Flaring 25 Applicable range of Field setting 71 Auto restart after power failure reset 72 G Grouped Drain 39 B Brazing euer det tre ee 23 H Hand Over to Customer 105 Handling Of 224 Centralized Control Group No Setting 75 Checks Before Initial Start up 191 Combination 155 Installation seen 14 Connecting the Refrigerant Piping 168 Installation of Indoor 16 Contents of Control Modes 77 Installation of Outdoor Unit 59 Control 52 cool heat operation 187 L Cooling Heating and Fan Only Oper
20. One outdoor unit installed In case of RXYQ5 16MY1B Front connection Remove the shutoff valve cover to connect W Side bottom connection Remove the knock holes on the bottom frame and route the piping under the bottom frame When multiple outdoor units installed In case of RXYQ18 48MY1B To connect the piping between outdoor units an optional piping kit multi connection piping kit is always required When installing the piping follow the instructions in the installation manual that comes with the kit W Front connection Remove the shutoff valve cover to connect W Side bottom connection Remove the knock holes on the bottom frame and route the piping under the bottom frame RXYQ5 16 type 1 2 7 12 13 1 Front connection 2 Remove the shutoff valve cover to connect 3 Flange 4 or flare nut in case of models Q5 type 5 Gas side accessory pipe 1 2 3 6 In case of Q5 type field supply 7 Oil equalizing piping shutoff valve Except Q5 8 No piping work is needed 9 Flare nut 10 Brazing 11 Liquid side piping field supply 12 Side bottom connection 13 Remove the knock holes on the bottom frame and route the piping under the bottom frame 14 Knockout hole 15 Punch the knock holes 16 Liquid side piping field supply 17 Oil equalizing piping field supply 168 Installation Manual Si39 303 Refrigerant Piping N Caution sure to use the attached pipe when c
21. Small larg charge label RXYQB8 10 14 16 type Gas line piping Name Clamp 1 Clamp 2 Clamp 3 attachedto unit 1 i 9 pcs 2 pcs 1 pc Shape Small Gas line Gas line piping piping Name attachedto attached to Others unit 2 unit 3 Quantit m Operation manual y 1 pc 1 Installation manual m Declaration of conformity h m Additional Snape J refrigerant charge label 156 Installation Manual Si39 303 Introduction RXYQ5 8 10 type RXYQ12 14 16 type 1 Operation manual Installation manual Clamp 2 Attached pipe 1 4 Option Accessory To install the above outdoor units the following optional parts are also required m Refrigerant branching kit For R410A only Always use an appropriate kit dedicated for your system REFNET header KHRP26M22H KHRP26M33H KHRP26M72H KHRP26M73H REFNET joint KHRP26M22T KHRP26M33T KHRP26M72T KHRP26M73T W Outdoor unit multi connection piping kit For R410A only Always use an appropriate kit dedicated for your system Number of outdoor units connected 2 units 3 units Kit name BHFP22M90 BHFP22M135 W Pipe size reducer For R410A only Always use an appropriate kit dedicated for your system Kit name KHRP26M73TP KHRP26M73HP BHFP22M90P BHFP22M135P dies of outdoor unit RXYQ24 48MY1B RXYQ24 32MY1B RXYQ34 48MY1B To select an optimum r
22. 00 140 Operational 15 RXYOSMY 1B iiie teta 138 2 0 4 15 0 440 139 Through holes reinforced concrete 15 Sound pressure rise due to room reverberation 106 Special vacuum 35 Standard Operation Limit 156 Standard Supplied Accessories 156 standard work practice for all brazing work 18 Step by Step Installation Procedure 14 Striking a Balance between System Installation and General Construction Work 10 Supplementation on and 91 System 220 183 TOSERUM verano 192 The analysis of major installation problems experienced during the year of 1988 9 The centralized control group number cannot DE Set rette 150 The Example of A Wrong Pattern Piping Installation Point 109 The use of hard solder is essential 22 Thermal Insulation Work Refrigerant Piping Essential Points of Thermal Insulation 28 Operational steps
23. 171 Fit blanking plugs u S 20 Installation of Outdoor Unit FIUSIING 20 BOPI sind Ie 59 Open the main valve on the nitrogen cylinder and Operational steps 59 set the pressure regulator to Unpacking and Placing the Unit 60 5 20 interconnecting wiring 2 190 Set pressure regulator on nitrogen cylinder 20 Refrigerant Pipe Work K AI MAb uu Qa han da xdi tap 17 knocking out knock holes 189 EEE a aa 17 titu d au aed itudin 17 iv Drawings amp Flow Charts Si39 303 Operational steps 17 Turn power on 62 The Principles of Refrigerant Piping 17 Refrigerant Ind TOR tea 222 U Remote Controller and Changeover Switch 203 Underside Piping 1 125 S Unpacking and Placing the Unit 165 selecting branch piping 170 v Selection of Location 56 162 Vacuum Drying iust eit ee e 31 Sequential start 187 Vacuum Drying Procedure
24. 34 Service 2 57 Vacuum pump with check valve 227 Set the flaring tool 24 Inspection Sheet 129 Setting of Air Flow Direction Adjustment Range 74 Setting of Demand Operation Ww Image of operation in the case of A 96 Wall Mounted Type FXAQ M Image of operation in the case of A and B 96 Connecting a hard vinyl chloride pipe joint 51 Image of operation in the case of B 96 drain hose i tern Peri mee RR ds 51 Setting of Low Noise Operation drain PIPING societe vette e ine Leelee 51 Image of operation in the case of A 94 Weigher for refrigerant charge 230 Image of operation in the case of A B 94 Wired Remote Controller 67 Image of operation in the case of B 94 Wireless Remote Controller Indoor Unit Setting the Master Remote Controller 212 BROZGC menm mes 68 Signal interference due to use of multiple Wiring Diagrams core cable etn eet eei 144 RXYQTOMY TB iiiter 139 Simplified Remote Controller 2 rians nin asopis 139 BRO2AS Toinne eem mnes 69 14 1 140 Sleeve and Insert Work 6
25. Demand set settin ing YES e o oo Olo Setting mode indication section Setting No indication section Set contents indication section 98 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 2 4 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging Operation When additional refrigerant is not charged all with outdoor unit in stop mode operate the outdoor unit and charge the liquid refrigerant from the service port of liquid stop value The additional charging operation is activated by pushbutton switch on the outdoor unit PC board Additional refrigerant charge total flow STEP 1 Additional charge without Compressor operation Confirm LIQ amp SUCTION and Oil equalizing Stop valve closed Turn off the power Charge through Service port of LIQ Stop valve Is all refrigerant charged YES STEP 2 Additional charge with Compressor operation Open Gas Stop valve Liquid side stop valve close Oil equalizing valve open in case of multi outdoor connection system Start additional refrigerant charge mode Setting Mode 2 Refer operation procedure detail on next page Is all refrigerant charged Open LIQ amp SUCTION Stop valve Disconnect charge hose END of charge method Open LIQUID Stop valve
26. Fig 17 General Information 51 Installation Si39 303 Floor Standin d g Rig the drain pipe as shown below and take measures against Concealed Floor condensation Improperly rigged piping could lead to leaks and Drip pan eventually wet furniture and belongings Standing Type 7 Connect the drain hose 1 using the attached hose and parts as FXLQ M FXNQ shown in the right drawing Clamp metal Attached part 2 M After piping work is finished check drainage flows smoothly B i 9 sure to insulate all indoor pipes NC Drain hose Attached part 50 or more 3 4 B drain pipe Cut to suitable length 3PN86154 1 7 3 2 10 Electrical Work Control Wiring 1 Compatible types of wire Wiring Specifications Wiring Type Shield Wire 2 wire See NOTE 1 2 Size 0 75 1 25 mm m Notes 1 Sheathed wire may be used for transmission wirings but they do not comply with EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN55014 When using sheathed wire EMI must conform to Japanese standards stipulated in the Electric Appliance Regulatory Act If using a sheathed wire the grounding shown in the figure on the left is unnecessary 2 For FXYAP indoor unit use sheathed wire 2 Problems arising from the use of unsuitable cable a When cable less than 0 75 mm is used Where the control wiring is particularly long the transmission signals may for example become
27. inspection test operation When the inspection test operation button is pressed the display shows the mode in which the system actually is 10 Display under centralized control When this display shows the system is under centralized control This is not a standard specification 11 Display fan speed This display shows the fan speed you have selected 12 Display lt gt time to clean air filter Refer to the indoor unit manual 13 Display defrost hot start Refer to the chapter Operation procedure Explanation of heating operation 14 Timer mode start stop button Refer to the chapter Operation procedure Programming start and stop of the system with timer 15 Timer on off button Refer to the chapter Operation procedure Programming start and stop of the system with timer 16 Inspection test operation button This button is only used by qualified service persons for maintenance purposes 17 Programming time button Use this button for programming start and or stop time 18 Temperature setting button Use this button for setting the desired temperature 19 Filter sign reset button Refer to the indoor unit manual 20 Fan speed control button Press this button to select the fan speed of your preference 21 Operation mode selector button Press this button to select the operation mode of your preference 22 Air flow direction adjust button Refer to the chapter Operation pr
28. Chart 4 3 0 25 Sum L of L and L2 Li L2 2 The corrective value relative to 2 0 L La is added to Li Sh 125 B 1 0r 0 5 0 0 5 10 15 Refer to sample calculation L L2 dB V1053 Sample calculation 1 L4 and L are given as compounded sounds of 50 and 49 dB respectively Since L4 Lp 50 49 1 the corrective value is 2 5 therefore 50 2 5 52 5 dB Sample calculation 2 When sounds of 40 dB 38 dB 37 dB and 40 dB are placed in order of magnitude we obtain the following 40 dB 40 dB 38 dB 37 dB To start the difference between 40 dB and 40 dB is 0 therefore we take a corrective value of 3dB and obtain 40 3 43 dB The compounded sound of 43 dB and 38 dB has a 5 0 dB difference thus a corrective value of 1 2 dB which gives us 44 2 dB from 43 1 2 In the same manner the corrective value for 44 2 dB and 37 dB is approximately 0 7 dB or in other words 44 2 0 7 44 9 dB General Information 107 Appendix Si39 303 7 2 Piping Installation Point Max 5m Connection Connection Maximum length from a connection Kit A Kit B kit 10m or less from first branch Equivalent Piping Length 13m lt Since there is a possibility that oil may be collected on a stop machine side install piping between outdoor units to go to level or go up to an outdoor unit and to make a slope V3084 The projection part between multi connect
29. m Differences The cylinder can not be used for mixed refrigerant since mixing ratio is changed during charging When R410A is charged in liquid state using charging cylinder foaming phenomenon is generated inside charging cylinder Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 229 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 9 Weigher for refrigerant charge W Specifications e High accuracy TA101A for 10 kg cylinder 2g TA101B for 20 kg cylinder 5g Equipped with pressure resistant sight glass to check liquid refrigerant charging A manifold with separate ports for HFCs and previous refrigerants is equipped as standard accessories Differences Measurement is based on weight to prevent change of mixing ratio during charging 10 Charge mouthpiece m Specifications e For R410A 1 4 5 16 2min gt 2 5min e Material is changed from CR to H NBR m Differences e Change of thread specification on hose connection side For the R410A use e Change of sealer material for the HFCs use 230 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 Symbols F 88 cannot be cleared from the central remote Field line connection 183 gt 151 Field 67 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit 79 A Field Wiring
30. Allowable length after the branch Actual pipe length Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit either refnet joint or refnet header to indoor unit lt 40m t lt 10m Approximately length max 13m Example unit 8 b c d e f g p lt 40m Example unit 6 b h lt 40m unit 8 1 k lt 40m Example unit 8 i lt 40m Refrigerant branch kit selection Refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R410A How to select the refnet joint When using refnet joints at the first branch counted from the outdoor unit side Choose from the following table in accordance with the capacity of the outdoor unit Outdoor unit capacity type Refrigerant branch kit name How to select the refnet header Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity of all the indoor units connected below the REFNET header Note 250 type cannot be connected below the REFNET header indoor capacity index Refrigerant branch kit name KHRP26M22H Max 4 kit KHRP26M33H Max 8 kit RXYQ5 type KHRP26M22T lt 200 RXYQ8 10 type KHRP26M33T lt 290 RXYQ12 22 type KHRP26M72T 290 lt x 640 24 type KHRP26M73T KHRP73TP 640 lt KHRP26M72H Max 8 kit KHRP26M73H Max 8 kit KHRP26M73HP For refnet joints other than the first branch select the proper branch kit model based on the total capacity index indoor capaci
31. STOP refrigerant charge model V2892 General Information 99 Test Operation Si39 303 Operation procedure detail After turning the respective remote switch of indoor and outdoor units off and charging the refrigerant turn on the power of indoor and outdoor units Do not fail to turn the power off and charge the refrigerant with outdoor unit in stop mode before adding the refrigerant following this procedure otherwise resulting in trouble Fully open the stop valve on the gas side and oil equalizing valve for multi outdoor connection and do not fail to fully close the stop valve on the liquid side If the stop valve on the liquid side is open the refrigerant cannot be charged In Setting mode 2 H1P ON with outdoor unit in stop mode Set A Additional refrigerant charging operation switch to ON to start the operation H2P turns to display TEST OPERATION blinks and TEST OPERATION and IN CENTRALIZED CONTROL are displayed on the remote controller When the refrigerant is charged up to the specified amount press the RETURN button BS3 to stop charging The charging operation is automatically stopped after operating for a maximum of about 30 minutes If the charging is not complete within 30 minutes set the A Additional refrigerant charging operation again to start charging When the charging immediately stops even by restarting the refrigerant is charged excessively The refrig
32. Unit mm Piping size outer diameter x minimum thickness indoor capacity type SSS Liquid pipe 20 25 32 40 50 type 12 7 x 0 80 96 4 x 0 80 63 80 100 125 type 15 9 x 0 99 200 type 19 1 x 0 80 9 5 x 0 80 250 type 22 2 x 0 80 Piping between outdoor branch and indoor unit part C Unit mm outdoor capacity type Piping size outer diameter x minimum thickness Gas pipe Liquid pipe RXYQ8 type 19 1 x 0 80 80 RXYQ10 type 022 2 x 0 80 upset RXYQ12 14 16 type 28 6 x 0 99 012 7 x 0 80 Oil equalizing line Only for RXYQ18 or more part D Piping size outer diameter x minimum thickness 06 4 x 0 80 Unit mm NOTE How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged Additional referigerant to be charged R Kg R should be rounded off in units of 0 1Kg If a negative result is gotten for R from the formula at right no refrigerant needs to be added size at 022 2 Total length m Total length m Total length m Total length m gt of liquid piping 0 35 of liquid piping x0 25 of liquid piping x0 17 of liquid piping 0 11 Example for refrigerant branch using refnet joint and refnet header for RXYQ34MY1B If the outdoor unit is z i 1 8 019 1 x 30m d 9 5 x 10m 9 0 6 4 x 10m 1 0 6 4 x 10m size 1 19
33. Finishing tape Thermal insulation Jointed areas must also be thoroughly ye i A 5 insulated m A O P This part has not Copper pipe been insulated Br Insulation X Neel support bracket V0986 m Important points 1 The thickness of the thermal insulation material must be determined in the light of the pipe sizes Pipe size Thickness of insulation material 6 4mm 25 4mm 10mm or more 28 6mm 38 1mm 15mm or more 2 It will be necessary to increase the values in the above table for top floors or where conditions are hot and humid Where a customer supplies his own specifications then these must be adhered to 4 Where it is anticipated that the air conditioning unit will be operated at external air temperatures of 10 C or less then thermal insulation will also be required for the liquid pipes 28 General Information Si39 303 Installation 3 2 5 Air Tight Test W Operational steps Complete Pressurize m Check for pressure drop Success refrigerant pipe installation work Pee ER tee Locate and repair leaks V0987 Essential Points The key to successful testing is strict adherence to the following procedure of Testing a The liquid and gas piping in each refrigerant system should be pressurized in turn in accordance wi
34. 224 8 Service Tools TR c TP 225 Table of Contents Si39 303 Table of Contents Si39 303 Part 1 General Information M ive eES E 2 1 1 Model Names of Indoor Outdoor 2 1 2 External Appearancoe eee 3 1 8 Combination of Outdoor 5 1 4 Model Selection e ettet eerte 6 Points to Bear in Mind at the System 8 2 1 Points Relating to the Performance of the Air Conditioning Units 8 2 2 The Installation is of Vital Importance 9 2 3 Striking a Balance between System Installation and General Construction Work Comprehensive Flow Chart 10 2 4 Points to Bear in Mind when Preparing the Contract Drawings 11 MIS VAN AMOR u uuu chaqa 14 3 1 Step by Step Installation 14 3 2 Work Involved in Individual Operations and Points to be Borne in 111 2 15 z S Test OB rati8nu u unuy oto DIT HORE EROS Esp eR QUEE 62 4 1 Procedure and Outline i te rab khe d 62 4 2 Operation When Power is Turned 65 4 3 Outdoor Unit PC Board 66 44 4 E
35. One outdoor a 2 ORO Se DM unit installed i Wie cee cs 0I SE S Dk RXYQ5 16 Refnet header b id 8 J j TE df 7 H3 2 3 4 5 Indoor units 1 8 E Outdoor unit REFNET joint A When multiple outdoor units E 3 k installed H1 b 18 Refnet eee ae 7 8 cr d 39 2 3 4 5 6 Indoor units 1 8 If the system capacity is RXYQ18 or more re read to the first outdoor branch as seen from the indoor unit Between outdoor and indoor units Actual pipe length Pipe length between outdoor and indoor units 150m Example unit 6 a b h lt 150m unit 8 a i k lt 150m Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outdoor and indoor units lt 175m assume equivalent pipe length of refnet joint to be 0 5m that of refnet header to be 1m calculation purposes Total extension length Total piping length from outdoor unit to all indoor units lt 300m Between outdoor branch and indoor unit Only for RXYQ18 or more Actual pipe length Piping length from outdoor branch to outdoor unit 10m Approximately length max 13m I Outdoor unit
36. Press the air flow direction button to select the air direction The air flow flap display swings as shown below and the air flow direction 5 continuously varies Automatic swing setting Press the air flow direction adjust button to select the air direction of your choice 1 1 The air flow flap display stops swinging and the air flow direction is fixed Fixed air flow direction setting Movement of the air flow flap Double flow Multi flow Corver MARQUE Wall Mounted 2 2 For the following conditions micro computer controls the air flow direction which may be different from the display COOLING HEATING When starting operation When the room temperature is higher than the set temperature At defrost operation When operating continuously at horizontal air flow direction When continuous operation with downward air flow is performed at the time of cooling with a ceiling suspended or a wall mounted unit the microcomputer may control the flow direction and then the remote control indication also will change The air flow direction can be adjusted in one of the following ways m The air flow flap itself adjusts its position m The air flow direction can be fixed by the user W Automatic z and desired position n Notes The movable limit of the flap is changeable Co
37. 10 G NG Room 11 G NG Room 12 G 2 Room 13 G Room 14 G Room 15 G NG Room 16 Indoor Auxiliary heater 500 V Room 17 G NG Room 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room20 G NG unit electrical megatester 1 MQ Room21 G NG 22 G NG Room23 G NG Room24 G NG insulation oom oom oom oom Room 25 G NG 26 G NG Room27 G NG Room28 G NG Room 29 G NG Room30 G NG Room31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG Room34 G NG Room35 G NG Room36 G NG Room37 G NG Room38 G NG Room39 G NG Room 40 G NG Room 1 G NG Room 2 G NG Room 3 G NG Room 4 G NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 NG 10 G NG Room11 G NG Room 12 G NG Room 13 G NG Room 14 G NG Room 15 G NG Room 16 NG Installation Visual i Short circuit etc Room 17 G NG Room 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room20 G NG inspection Room21 G NG 22 G NG Room23 G NG Room 24 G NG Room25 G NG Room26 G NG Room27 G NG Room28 G NG Room29 G NG Room 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG Room 34 G 35 G NG Room 36 G NG Room 37 G NG 38 G Room39 G NG Room 40 G NG V1092 General Information 131 Appendix Si39 303 Dur
38. General Information 65 Test Operation Si39 303 4 3 Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout Outdoor unit PC board 2 Set mode display LED 3 Mode setting switch 1234 1234 ume DS1 DS2 P4 2 2 2 I l I 4 Local setting switch Connection terminal for transmission use 2 0102 Indoor Outdoor i Switch cool heat Outdoor Outdoor Multi outdoor V3054 1 Microcomputer normal monitor This monitor blinks while in normal operation and turns on or off when a malfunction occurs 2 Set mode display LED LEDs display mode according to the setting 3 Mode setting switch Used to change mode 4 Local setting switch Used to make local settings 66 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 Field Setting 4 4 1 Field Setting from Remote Controller Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller At the time of installation or after service inspection repair make the local setting in accordance with the following description Wrong setting may cause malfunction When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit setting for the indoor unit may be required to change Refer to information in the option handbook 4 4 1 1 Wired Remote Controller lt BRC1A61 62 gt Second Code No First Code No Field Set Mode Ji zl
39. Never put any objects into the air inlet or outlet Objects touching the fan at high operating speed can be dangerous Never remove the fan guard of the outdoor unit A fan rotating at high speed without the fan guard is very dangerous Never press the button of the remote controller with a hard pointed object The remote controller may be damaged Never pull or twist the electric wire of the remote controller It may cause the unit to malfunction Never inspect or service the unit by yourself Ask a qualified service person to perform this work To prevent refrigerant leak contact your Daikin dealer When the system is installed and run in a small room it is required to keep the concentration of the refrigerant if by and chance coming out bellow the limit Otherwise oxygen in the room may be affected resulting in a serious accident Cut off all electric waves before servicing Operation Manual 205 Operation Range Si39 303 5 Operation Range Use the system in the following temperature and humidity ranges for safe and effective operation COOLING HEATING Outdoor temperature 5 43 CDB 20 21 CDB 20 15 5 CWB Indoor temperature 21 32 CDB 15 27 CDB 14 25 CWB Indoor humidity lt 80 To avoid condensation and water dripping out the unit If the temperature or the humidity is beyond these conditions safety devices may work and the air conditioner may not opera
40. Si39 303 RXYQ34 48MY1B 8rZOv0de SLINA YOON 3NI1 H3M0d 3NI1 83404 j18V S3UIM 318v S3UIM Z 3NI1 H3M0d 3NI1 H3M0d 35 4 3513 318V S3U M 3503 HOLIMS NJ 3NI1 NOISSINSNYHI NI worssinsnvan 318V S3UIM 0 318V S3UIM 2 LINN 1 LINN ZNIT_NOISSIMSNVUL 3W11 NOISSINSNYYL 318 2 318 S3EIM Z SLINA 8000100 S un 941 U99418q 591195011 9129 102 S 924105 JIMOd 3Y 1944 10 10J papuaiu NOISSINSNYUL 318V S3UIM asnd HILINS N HOLIMS NIWA onn H3M0d 3NI1 H3M0d 3NI1 83404 3187 S3UIM Z SLINM 800081 3NI1 H3W0d 318v S3UIM Z 3811 3804 71872 S3HIM Z 3513 3513 3513 11 5 H ILIMS HOLIMS 311 NOISSINSNVUL 3NI1 NOISSIMS
41. T If the electric wave of AM broadcasting is particularly weak keep distances of 3m or more and use conduit tubes for power and transmission lines In heavy snowfall areas select an installation site where snow will not affect operation of the unit The refrigerant R410A itself is nontoxic nonflammable and is safe If the refrigerant should leak however its concentration may exceed the allowable limit depending on room size Due to this it could be necessary to take measures against leakage Refer to the chapter Caution for refrigerant leaks Do not install in the following locations eLocations such as kitchens which contain a lot of mineral oil or steam in the atmosphere or where oil may splatter on the unit Resin parts may deteriorate causing the unit to fall or leak eLocations where sulfurous acids and other corrosive gases may be present in the atmosphere Copper piping and soldered joints may corrode causing refrigerant to leak eLocations where equipment that produces electromagnetic waves is found The electromagnetic waves may cause the control system to malfunction preventing normal operation eLocations where flammable gases may leak where thinner gasoline and other volatile substances are handled or where carbon dust and other incendiary substances are found in the atmosphere Leaked gas may accumulate around the unit causing an explosion 56 General Information Si39 303 Inst
42. This operation manual is for the following systems with standard control Before initiating operation contact your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system type and mark If your installation has a customized control system ask your Daikin dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system Outdoor units Cool heat changeover remote control switch Operation modes Inverter series heat pumps RXYQ yes 2 series Heat recovery series heat pumps REYQ series yes Ono ee Al ede B Names and functions of parts BS Branch selection unit Cool heat changeover remote control switch Left figure shows systems with changeover remote control switches RXYQ series 7 REYQ series 1 Outdoor unit 2 Indoor unit 3 Remote controller 4 Inlet air 5 Outlet air 6 7 202 Operation Manual Si39 303 Remote Controller and Changeover Switch Name and Function of Each Switch and Display 3 Remote Controller and Changeover Switch Name and Function of Each Switch and Display RXYQ series uu 10 3k 1239 1 n TEST A A 5 v v 5 BRC1A51 8 02 REYQ series ee 9 Al 670 OPTION i
43. lt 10m s lt 10m t lt 10m Between outdoor and indoor units t Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units H1 x 50m Max 40m if the outdoor unit is below Between indoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between adjacent indoor units H2 lt 15m Between outdoor and outdoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor unit main and outdoor unit sub H3 lt 5m Actual pipe length Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit either refnet joint or refnet header to indoor unit 40m Example unit 6 b h lt 40m unit 8 i k lt 40m length after the branch General Information 111 Appendix Si39 303 7 3 3 Branch with refnet header Maximum allowable length Allowable height length Allowable length after the branch Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system Branch with refnet header Outdoor unit Refnet header One outdoor unit installed RXYQ5 16 H1 Indoor units 1 8 Outdoor unit Refnet header H3 When multiple 22 outdoor units installed H1 RXYQ18 JIS J Ue Ee S
44. 1041302 91815 TVNINHJI WIX 8055389909 2 21N HOLINS 21150 214405 83404 91815 WIX un 42 WOLIOVdYO 712 dEV 92 31000N 83404 1891 UZA HOldVOY 801140 AVI3H 2113N 13538 1531 NUNIY 1345 9000 92 390188 30010 91 2113N9VN HOLIMS NOLina HSnd 4 158 dIV 5321430 AYS d1V 9H23 AV13H 9113NDVN 805195 NIBUNI QUVOS 1109812 CIN d9 46 A0Z A012 022 W3NUOJSNVUL 91 H3 AV138 9113N5VM III 35109 QNS 1102812 BIN 99 4 HOSN3S IN3HH02 dlV SLA AVI3H 1L3NOWN NVA 1908 1102812 H91H HOLIMS 34055344 Hd HdlS 91 59 AV13H 2113NOVNW ug ANT 8 08 110281 BIN dZV M01 805435 3855344 TANIS 91 98 A138 2113NDVM UL 8908 1109812 C3IN Wie n 1 17 X08 HOLIMS CELE 24 14 00PULL 1055300 1WWOL140 80123135 138 1002 24 14 400p3n0 Uf 2D 10 s00p3n0 QF 1 DN m 954 158i hog Em dv 5 ul j 8 Y 0123135 1V3H 1009 iN ney WIX 890 av 40123402 8408 1102812 UO M 37 11840640 8010 NOLIVMIMTHOSIU A v INaNOdMOD 80107 80133802 C2 Leza WOR 1102813 31NINd 3 40103 YOLIINNOJ e LLH DIE di 78 LM J038 m sM y rr 3 M tt ete 109 NE AOBEZ TAN EE 2808 NE ASLY O8E LAN dlc N Aldd lS 8304
45. D d A OSS300 140 401931 5 38 100 Y wily L ar S 3LON LX ssr Sin 88 ERA 5 0 10 24 C 1N0HJ 101 100 100 100 We LAX n QV3T 1N3W04W02 8030 NDLIVNINIUDS i i INNOANOO 803 80102 123400 Ida lga g le 8 08 1112412 314144 40102 w01 3440 e LLU 199 1S4 dry 104 ae HANTS T OF n n n 1415 di 2 J ma a I Il l J 3 N 139 General Information Si39 303 RXYQ14MY1B RXYQ16MY1B Appendix
46. RXYQ14MY1B RXYQ16MY1B l l Pressure regulating Capillary valve tube Pid S I Solenoid valve Filter I Electronic expansion valve Electronic a expansion valve I Solenoid I I p wale High pressure SP sensor Sk Pressure regulating Z Check High pressure a m Pressure valve gg Valve switch o 5 lt B regulating Filter BS HS valve i zm T i High pressure switch s HPS HPS 22 m E 2 High pressure zB switch I I Compressor Compressor i Capillary m Check 5 tube valve ev Capillary I tube I D sp Low pressure I N Sensor Check valve 57 Solenoid NE ici OA valve gt N X p valve With service port on on site piping side 7 9mm flare connection 4D040339A 136 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 10 2 Indoor Unit FXCQ FXZQ FXFQ FXKQ FXSQ FXMQ FXHQ FXAQ FXLQ FXNQ 727727222222 270 Gas piping connection port Heat exchanger Vie connection 015 9 or less Attached piping Above 019 1 pu Liquid piping connection port Flare connection Filter Electronic Filter expansion valve DU220 602D R1T Thermistor for suction air temperature R2T Thermistor for liquid line temperature R3T Thermistor for gas line temperature mm Capacity GAS Liquid 20 25 32 40 012 7 06 4 63 80 100 125M 015 9 99 5 200
47. TAN 180646 AS1F 08 LAN 1905 83404 zgsgeode 1V3H 1009 HOLINS 90193135 505 HOIH 805435 3 155444 HdNIS 91 SPA 2LL3NOVR HOA ayyyuo owo N3389 M89 AYHD AUD NNOU NHB NOTI2A NTA ANIA ANd LM 3008 18 38 028 JOV18 18 5301028 1002 83 HOLIMS 80123135 SIS 3414 110 WOISIWESHI tLe dlv SEA AVIAU 2LINOVI SEE 8805 4415 321A30 NOI123100d 803 1102813 LHOHS 1 NOU 5981178340 L v92 61983 0123135 1 3 1002 03413238 3414 911 HO1SINH3HI 194 91 52 AVI3U 9 13NVW uri WOLINS Z 150 NV 558 158 ISN OL MOH 83402 HOLIMS NO 73971 NOLLNVD NOIINM3dO OL 033389 E eM St or n UNUS 000 3 VON TWISNI 3 3130 ESEUUSEY 30805 ALIA U3ITIJ 35104 217 308VHOSIQ 22 DIN HOlSINH3HI ICE LIEU ND AVI38 2L LINOVN NOLLYTIVISNI JHL 01 83438 HOLdVOY NOILAO 3HL ONISN 3802 3118833 3510N 27 217 1011205 HOLSINUSHL IZY dV AY13U J1L3NDVN ubl 83425 HLUYJ 3411231084 101234402400 4115 TYNINUaL T JAVA AYM 7 1083105 SLA 41 WIV HOISIWH3HI 2 HOLOVINOD 911389 WZ NIY C1313 7 7 7 3414 11011 01083105 59 d N14 HOLSIWH3HI ITU N3309 80L NON 391 A35 dV LO dVH LINN 4000100 IHL OL AINO 031199 51 MYHOVIQ ONIHIM SIHL I 308nd Sv9 3ATVA 1083105 SSK 407 40151534 1H911 01123140 NOLLONNSTYN Jl JIN S3LON 3004 510 11132387
48. bb m i Bree 1 1 1 1 4 Operation sound level set with External low noise setting Operation sound during low noise mode is instructed can be set with External low noise level setting Factory setting is Mode 2 Image of operation in the case of B A Operation sound Rated operatison sound Operation sound of mode 1 Operation sound F of mode 2 Operation sound f of mode 3 Time set with Night time low noise start setting conditioning when load is heavier If capacity precedence is set in Capacity precedence setting the fan speed will be increased according to the load of air gt V3078 Time set with Night time low noise end setting Operation sound during night time low noise mode is instructed can be set with Night time low noise level setting Factory setting is DFF oa 1 I i H 1 n i 1 1 NA trs e l O s le 1 1 I 11 P i 1 i i i Operation sound level set with Night time low noise setting i i PM 8 00 10 00 0 00 6 00 7 00 8 00 sI L Set with Night time low noise start setting Factory setting is PM 10 00 Image of operation in the case of A B A Operation sound Rated operation sound Operation sound 77
49. gt Sie 250 2500 NT Saree z Pattern 3 fsaq9 2 Pattern 3 3300 2 2 8 210 1 2200 2400 1 2400 D There is no danger of fire due to leakage of inflammable gas Ensure that water cannot cause any damage to the location in case it drips out the unit e g in case of a blocked drain pipe The piping length between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit may not exceed the allowable piping length see Example of connection Select the location of the unit in such a way that neither the discharged air nor the sound generated by the unit disturb anyone Make sure that the air inlet and outlet of the unit are not positioned towards the main wind direction Frontal wind will disturb the operation of the unit If necessary use a windscreen to block the wind An inverter air conditioner may cause electronic noise generated from AM broadcasting Examine where to install the main air conditioner and electric wires keeping proper distances away from stereo equipment personal computers etc indoor unit Branch switch Branch switch remote L overcurrent breaker overcurrent breaker 3 8 contoler e neat 9 selector N W N Z 21500 H personal computer O seo or radio
50. of mode 1 Operation sound of mode 2 Operation sound Time set with Night time low noise start setting Set with Night time low noise end setting Factory setting is AM 8 00 If capacity precedence is set in Capacity precedence setting the fan speed will be increased according to the load of air conditioning when load is heavier Operation sound level set with T T 1 V3079 Time set with Night time low noise end setting Operation sound during low noise mode is instructed can be set with External low noise level setting Factory setting is Mode 2 Operation sound during night time low noise mode is instructed can be set with Night time low noise level setting Factory setting is OFF Low noise mode instructing i setting Operation sound set with oumode Operation sound set with i External low noise setting When external low noise External low noise setting instruction is received during the operation with night time PM8 00 PM 10 00 PM 0 00 AM 6 00 AM 7 00 AM 8 00 low noise mode a APSE ey Mode 2 precedes Mode 1 3 A y Mode 3 precedes Mode 2 Set with Night time low noise start setting Set with Night time low noise end setting Facto
51. 1 Install the drain piping Refer to Fig 16 Type FXAQ M The drain pipe should be short with a downward slope and should prevent air pockets from forming Watch out for the points in the figure 16 when performing drain work n Make sure the drain hose is at a downward slope Drain hose Drain hose Downward slope L sure the tip does not go underwater even when water is added Fig 16 When extending the drain hose use a commercially available drain extension hose and be sure to insulate the extended section of the drain hose which is indoors Refer to Fig 17 Indoor unit drain hose Extension drain piping locally procured wt ENNNNNNNS Insulating tube 77227772 locally procured Insulating tape accessory 4 Make sure the diameter of the piping is the same as the piping hard vinyl chloride nominal diameter 13mm or bigger When directly connecting a hard vinyl chloride pipe joint nominal diameter 18mm to the drain hose connected to the indoor unit i e for embedded piping etc use a commercially available hard vinyl chloride pipe joint nominal diameter 13mm Refer to Fig 18 N lt 0 Drain hose connected Commercially available Commercially available to the indoor unit hard vinyl chloride pipe hard vinyl chloride pipe joint nominal diameter 13mm nominal diameter 13mm Fig 18
52. 1105 RXYQ36MY1B 450 1170 RXYQ38MY1B 475 1235 RXYQ40MY1B 500 1300 RXYQ42MY1B 525 1365 RXYQ44MY1B 550 1430 RXYQ46MY1B 575 1495 RXYQ48MY1B 600 1560 8 units 13 units 16 units 19 units 20 units 20 units 20 units 20 units 22 units 32 units 32 units 32 units 32 units 32 units 34 units 36 units 38 units 40 units 40 units 40 units 40 units 40 units Total quantity of indoor units Installation Manual 155 Introduction Si39 303 1 2 Standard Operation Limit The figures below assume following operating conditions for indoor and outdoor units Equivalent pipe length 7 5m Level difference Om Cooling Heating 40 ch D 1415 2 2 B I 5 10 15 20 252730 D A Outdoor temperature CDB B Indoor temperature CWB Outdoor temperature CWB D Indoor temperature CDB Ew Range for continuous operation Range for pull down operation Range for warming up operation 1 3 Standard Supplied Accessories RXYQ5 type Name Clamp Clamp Clamp Others 1 2 3 uA 9 pcs 2 pcs 1 pc m Operation manual m Installation manual 2
53. 2 demand Address for low noise demand operation 5 Indoor unit forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit fan while unit is fan stopped H tap 6 forced Allows forced operation of indoor unit 8 Te setting Target evaporation temperature for cooling 9 Tc setting Target condensation temperature for heating 10 Defrost changeover Changes the temperature condition for defrost and sets to setting quick defrost or slow defrost 11 2 etting Sets sequential operation External low noise 12 setting Demand Reception of external low noise or demand signal setting 13 AIRNET address Set address for AIRNET 18 High static pressure Make this setting in the case of operating in high static setting pressure mode with diffuser duct mounted Emerasno Used to operate system only with inverter compressor y when STD compressor malfunctions This is a temporary 19 STD COmDBISSSOF operation extremely impairing comfortable environment operation p Therefore prompt replacement of the compressor is ie required prohibited This operation however is not set with RXYQ5M Additional 20 refrigerant charge Carries out additional refrigerant charge operation operation setting Refrigerant 21 collection mode Sets to refrigerant collection mode setting Sets automatic nighttime low noise operation in a simple 22 Night time low way noise setting The operating time is based on Starting set and Ending set Set
54. General Information Si39 303 Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design 2 2 The Installation is of Vital Importance The analysis of major installation problems experienced during the year of 1988 is shown below Wrong interconnection wiring 37 5 Wrong setting of switches 15 9 Wrong power line wiring 8 596 Improper field piping 6 896 wee Improper drain piping 6 196 le le SE Refrigerant leak from FLARE 4 69 Improper model selection 1 496 Refrigerant leak from BRAZING 1 19 Improper installation place 0 996 Improper power supply voltage 396 Defective insulation work 0 296 SS Improper technical information 2 Miscellaneous 16 7 V1147 How these installation problems affect an equipment are shown below Operation under over heat condition Refrigerant leak from tubes Shortage of refrigerant Piping and wiring upsidedown Contamination inside tubes Moisture inside tubes Oil return insufficient Improper installation place short circuit of air Reduced capacity Power line connected to control circuit Insulation test applied to circuits other than power line Excessive force applied to PC board Defective compressor Defective electronic component V0947 General Information 9 Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design Si39 303 2 3 Striking a Balance between System Installation and Genera
55. RU MSS 3811 NOISSINSNVHI 71472 SIIM Z 3187 S3UIM 2 71872 S3HIN Z 1 1 1 1 LY L 1 3504 3513 3515 211 5 211 5 211 5 1 IN LINN Z LINN 1 LINN 3811 NOISSINSNYML N17 NOJSSINSNYHL 318 Z TIV S3HIN Z SLINA 8000100 P aon 14405 H3M0d 1 un Joop ino 299 nos 19 04 941 19 GLANT LOAXH BLANTEDAXH 40 2522 11 61 Un 34 1994190 591195 u p2129UUOO S 924 0 19604 94 UIYM GLANO DAXH 94 1snu 11180 OL 8921108 JOMOd a d i nu 94 2 1 1uaudinba 991 JO 51515102 91545 519 asneraq JOUURW pa3eJbojui ue ui 592005 J MOd IYJ j 391149301 ued 1euj 921185 ureu 991 1191801 6 jueudinbo 9229 JO 19 04 9U3 0 Osnj 3Y pue 1211845 994 15 OF 9415 ag 9 001301101501 21412945 V J04 s 1033p apnjou 01 JOU 912 pue AJ UO sapinb u0 129UU02 j0 siU 0d 19186 due UMOYS BULJIM L 2 PUO 1eU PUR 7220 9 4221 44 991 4 02 papunoJb aq 1095 yrun 9 1211122 9 pasuad AQ p p A04d JSNW S UdUOdWOD pue BULJIM pja j IV 39198 10 19797940 1102112 10150 ueibeip 995 651 10 SY 100 1012npu02 194402 950 9p02 PUO ZeU 0220 aj qed dde 34 YIM K dwod Ysnw 9415 94 U0 1 2014 0 s e i91PU pue s3uauoduoo Buldim L 830N 4 Y t 143 General Information Appendix Si39 303 7 12 Bad Exampl
56. Setting contents indication Initial setting No contents contents H P H5P H6P H7P HIP H3P H5P HOP H7P H P H5P H7P 22 OFF low noise Factory setting setting Mode 1 0 Mode 2 Ole Mode 3 Olej 25 External Voce Ole el oe o low noise setting Mode 2 Factory e setting Mode 3 e 26 Night time 0 PM800 Oe e e low noise start setting PM 10 00 Factory e setting PM00 0 27 Night time O 600 ow noise end setting AM 7 00 e AM 8 00 Factory e ojo setting 29 Capacity Low noise precedence precedence setting O O O Factory ole 9 setting Capacity precedence ole E 30 Demand 60 of setting 1 O O O OJ O ratedpower O consumption 70 of rated power consumption O setting 80 of ratedpower e ee consumption 32 OFF demand Factory Ol e e el ojo setting setting Continuous demandi O fixed 12 External NO low noise Factory e
57. Size kgf cm 15 N m 15 kgf cm 15 N m 15 M8 125 1230 302 2960 M10 257 2520 620 6080 M12 436 4280 1 050 10 300 M16 1 030 10 100 2 480 24 300 M20 2 050 20 100 4 950 48 500 General Information 27 Installation Si39 303 3 2 4 Thermal Insulation Work Refrigerant Piping W Operational steps Insulation with Refrigerant pipe the exception of ENT Insulation work the jointed Air tight test jointed areas areas V0985 Materials The thermal insulation materials which are used must be well able to withstand the heat from the pipes Example Heat pump type Heat resistant polyethylene foam heat resistance of at least 120 C Cooling only Polyethylene foam heat resistance of 100 C or more Essential Points The insulation of jointed areas such as the soldered flared or flanged sections should only be carried out of Thermal after the successful completion of the air tight test Insulation Attention should be paid to the unit model and its operating conditions since there are occasions when the gas and liquid pipes also need to be thermally insulated Example of incorrect work Example of correct work e Gas and liquid piping should not be Insulation of gas pipe Insulation of both gas insulated together and liquid pipes Insulation of support brackets Liquid pipe Gas pipe Control Insulation Insulation cable
58. Standard Operation Limit 156 Standard Supplied Accessories 156 Step by Step Installation Procedure 14 T Technical Specifications 158 Test Operation 62 Procedure Oulline 62 TOSUBUD u aa e teatro ti eerie bt t dete 192 The centralized control group number cannot be m 150 Thermal Insulation 28 Transmission wiring between the cool heat selector and the outdoor unit is too close to a high voltage wire 150 v Vacuum Dyin u a s 31 175 VRV Inspection 129 Wired Remote Controller 67 Wireless Remote Controller Indoor Unit BRGZ7G type ancien dete 68 Wiring 2 138 Index Si39 303 Drawings amp Flow Charts Symbols Indoor drain 00 43 88 cannot be cleared from the central remote multiple drain pipes 43 Cat 2 RENE I oe 151 Rig drain piping 43 Terminal box lid 44 A Ceiling Mounted Duct Type FXMQ M 49 Additional Charge o
59. UO hae dant 9p02 01120 pue 2201 9 4 21 440 Yim Que 4 02 u papunolb 94 jjeus 1101 9 1 2014 99 0 s e J83eu pue siuauoduoo 1 59704 HOLIMS NIVN 141 General Information Si39 303 Appendix RXYQ18 32MY1B ZvLov0de SLINA Nod 3NI1 H3M0d 318V S3UIM 3NI1 H3M0d J18V Z 3NI1 U3M0d 318v S3UIM Z 3 11 H3M0d 318v S3HIM 3503 SLINA 400481 3811 83404 318 2 S3UIM Z 3513 MOd 3411 H3003 J1HV S3UIM 7 3503 HOLIMS 3N 1 318 2 53U M 318V S3UIM 0 3 11 NOISSINSNYHI 318 2 S3UIM 3N11 NOISSINSNVHL 318V S3UIM Z asnd 3504 3513 211 5 H ILIMS HOLIMS N Jn 3NI1 NOISSINSNVUL 3NI1 NOISSINSNVHL 3NI1 NOISSINSNVHI 318V S3UIM 0 118 2 S3UIM NOISS WSNVHI j18V S3UIM
60. guideline Measurement values Decision Breaker capacity Visual inspection Specified capacity G NG Refrigerant piping system Gas detector No leaks G NG um Heat exchanger Visual inspection No clogging or damage G NG 2 5 Terminal connection section Screwdriver etc No looseness G NG _ 9 Fan motor electrical insulation 500 V megatester 1 MQ or more MQ 2 O Compressor electrical insulation 500 V megatester 1 MQ or more INV MQ STD1 STD2 MQ Installation Visual inspection Short circuit etc G NG Refrigerant piping system Gas detector No leaks G NG N Heat exchanger Visual inspection No clogging or damage G NG c 5 Terminal connection section Screwdriver etc No looseness G NG 9 Fan motor electrical insulation 500 V megatester 1 MQ or more MQ g 2 Compressor electrical insulation 500 megatester 1 MQ or more Installation Visual inspection Short circuit etc G NG Refrigerant piping system Gas detector No leaks G NG 52 Visual inspection clogging or damage G NG Terminal connection section Screwdriver etc No looseness G NG o amp Fan motor electrical insulation 500 V megatester 1 or more MQ g 2 O Compressor electrical insulation 500 V megatester 1 MQ or more Installation Visual inspection Short circuit etc G NG Room 1 G Room 2 G 3 G NG Room 4 G NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G
61. 1 9 1 6 pu Oil charge volume 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 33 33 33 33 939199 ESEE Crankcase heater w 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 Refrigerant type R410A R410A R410A R410A Refrigerant charge kg 9 6 14 4 14 4 11 4 14 4 14 4 12 9 14 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 14 4 Nominal air flow m min 18042104210 21042104210 21042104210 21042104210 Fan motor output w 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 75047504750 Installation Manual 159 Introduction Si39 303 1 6 Electrical Specifications Model RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B RXYQ14MY1B 16 1 3N 3N 3N 3N 3N 3N Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 Power supply Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 Voltage torerance 10 10 10 10 10 10 Recommended fuses A 20 30 30 30 40 40 Phase 3 3 3 3 3 3 Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 Compressor Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 Y 4 4 4 8 5 7 6 2 Nominal running 2 8 3 1 5 8 6 3 7 7 8 4 2 4 92 current A 6 1 6 7 7 3 7 9 7 7 8 4 7 8 8 5 8254 i 52 Voltage V 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240
62. 1 size s 2 015 9 10 9 5 10 h 0 64 20 64 9m right c 9 5 x 10m f 09 5 x 10m i 012 7 x 10m Model name Amount of refrigerant Total length m Total length m 11 of liquid piping 0 054 of liquid piping x0 022 RXYQ5 16MY1B 0 kg R 30X0 25 10 x0 17 100 11 40 lt 0 054 490 022 6 7 538 size at 9 5 size at 06 4 FXYQ18 32MY1B 3kg 1 j 1 i 49 RXYQ34 48MY1B 6 kg a b i g h j k 75 Installation Manual 173 Refrigerant Piping Si39 303 174 Installation Manual Si39 303 6 4 Leak test and Vacuum Drying Notes The units were checked for leaks by the manufacturer Confirm that the valves are firmly closed before pressure test or vacuuming To prevent entry of any impurities and insure sufficient pressure resistance always use the special tools dedicated for R410A Air tight test and vacuum drying m Air tight test Make sure to use nitrogen gas For the service port location refer to the Caution label attached on the front panel right of the outdoor unit 1 Service precautions Label location 2 Electric box lid 3 Caution Label location Pressurize the liquid and gas pipes to 3 8MPa 38bar do not pressurize more than 3 8MPa 38bar If the pressure does not drop within 24 hours the system passes the test If the pressure drops check where the nitrogen leaks from m Vacuum drying Use a vacuum pump wh
63. 100 200 300 500 1000 2 Floor area m V1052 Table 1 A B C Floor Mortar Linoleum tile Carpet Fiberglass Room Interior Walls Mortar Plaster ini Detection Saronoross finish Ceiling Mortar mineral wool tile Average Absorbed Sound Room with 0 05 0 12 0 25 Approx 50 m Floor Area Typical office Estimated value to be added to catalogue value 11512 8 8 5 5 6 Classifications of indoor unit environments reference data Table 2 Classification Environment Example NOTE 2 E naad on Site is Reception rooms libraries sitting rooms 1 Non active places requiring silence hospitals examining rooms NOTE 1 35 40 2 Sedate business activities that do not Quiet offices classrooms small 40 45 disturb people even over time conference rooms lobbies Somewhat quiet settings that permit Small offi f 3 soft spoken conversation typical 45 50 activities quiet stores restaurants Somewhat loud settings that permit 4 regular conversation brisk activity Large offices typical stores cafeterias 50 55 Loud places that permit conversation 5 in a loud voice highly active place large side offices large cafeterias 55 60 with many people Factories gymnasiums recreational E 6 Rather loud settings places like pachinko parlors 60 65 m Notes 1 Excluding bedrooms 2 Reference values of faint noises in the place of usage 106 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7
64. 121016 TYPE How to mount the front panel the front panel leaving some clearance at the upper part and hook the panel to the stopper Lift the panel and set the hole position Fasten the screws For 8 amp 10 TYPE QD LA 7 gt For 5 amp 121016 TYPE How to remove the transport fixtures After the unit is installed remove the transport fixture mounted on the opening large AN Attention in installation of EL COMP BOX COVER 3P115922 Please install it In the back Side lower part and pasting up Seal materials mer sur terminal block compromise and not to stop Right fig reference e n the case of 8 10TYPE power s upply ease install a cover before installation of an ex boar There is the fear that seal materials come close EL COMP BOX cross section The left side There is the fear EL COMP that seal materials BOX COVER come close in power supply terminal block x seal materials a bottom 4P115178 General Information 61 Test Operation Si39 303 4 Test Operation 4 1 Procedure and Outline Follow the following procedure to conduct the initial test operation after installation 4 1 1 Check work prior to turn power
65. 14 G NG Room 15 G NG Room 16 NG Fan noise Listening No noise Or Room 17 G NG Room 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room 20 G NG vibration vibration Room21 G NG 22 G NG Room23 G NG Room 24 G NG 25 G NG 26 G NG Room 27 G NG Room28 G NG Room 29 G NG Room 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG 34 G Room35 G NG Room36 G NG Room 37 G 38 G 39 G NG Room40 G NG Room 1 A Room 2 A Room 3 A Room 4 A Room 5 A Room 6 A Room 7 A Room 8 A Room 9 A Room10 A Room11 A Room12 A Room13 Room14 A Room15 A Room16 A i Room17 A Room18 A Room19 A Room20 A Glamp meter Room21 A Room22 A Room23 A Room24 A Room25 A Room26 A Room27 A Room28 A Room29 A Room30 A Room31 A Room32 A Room33 A Room34 A Room35 A Room36 A Room37 A Room38 A Room39 A Room40 A V1094 General Information 133 Appendix Si39 303 7 10 Piping System Diagrams 7 10 1 Outdoor Unit RXYQ5MY1B Filter Receiver exchanger pipe Fan Filter lt Filter Electronic HT expansion valve Heat exchanger Four way valve High pressure sensor Pressure regulating valve separator Filter Compressor Filter Stop valve With service port on on site piping side 7 9mm flare connection 4D040337B 134 General Information
66. 28 Tighten the bolts in opposite corners first to ensure that the connection is true 27 Tightening torque 176 Torque wrench y uQ haya 227 Transmission wiring between the cool heat selector and the outdoor unit is too close to a high voltage Mul 150 Troubleshooting eene 218 Drawings amp Flow Charts V DAIKIN INDUSTRIES LTD DAIKIN EUROPE NV Head office Zandvoordestraat 300 B 8400 Oostende Belgium Umeda Center Bldg 4 12 Nakazaki Nishi 2 chome Kita ku Osaka 530 8323 Japan Tokyo office Shinjuku Sumitomo Bldg 6 1 Nishi Shinjuku 2 chome Shinjuku ku Tokyo 163 0235 Japan For further improvement specifications or designs are subject to change without prior notice Printed in Japan 07 2003 AK
67. 3 oe Piping between refrigerant branch kits W Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity of all the indoor units connected below this m Do not let the connection piping exceed the refrigerant piping size chosen by general system model name Indoor capacity index Piping size outer diameter Unit mm lt 200 915 9 09 5 200 lt x lt 290 022 2 290 lt x lt 420 912 7 028 6 420 lt lt 640 915 9 640 x 920 934 9 919 1 920 941 3 Piping between outdoor branches part B W Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity of all the outdoor units connected below this Outdoor capacity index Piping size outer diameter Unit mm 22HP 028 6 915 9 24HP pm 26HP 919 1 General Information 115 Appendix Si39 303 Between refrigerant branch kit and indoor unit W Pipe size for direct connection to indoor unit must be the same as the connection size of indoor unit Unit mm Piping size outer diameter indoor capacity type 20 25 32 40 50 type 012 7 96 4 63 80 100 125 type 915 9 200 type 919 1 09 5 250 type 022 2 Piping between outdoor branch and outdoor unit part Unit mm Piping size outer diameter Outdoor capacity type RXYQ8 type 919 1 29 5
68. 33 33 33 Crankcase heater W 33433433 39433433 33433433 33433433 33433433 Refrigerant type R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A Refrigerant charge kg 12 9 14 4 1444144 9 6 9 6 12 9 9 6 9 6 144 9 6411 44144 9 6 12 9 144 Nominal air flow min 210 210 210 210 180 180 210 180 180 210 180 210 210 180 210 210 Fan motor output w 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 158 Installation Manual Si39 303 Introduction General RXYQ42MY1B RXYQ44MY1B RXYQ46MY1B RXYQ48 MY1B Nominal cooling capacity kW 117 0 123 0 129 0 134 0 Nominal heating capacity kW 132 0 138 0 145 0 150 0 Nominal input cooling heating kW 40 2 37 4 41 8 38 8 45 5 40 9 46 9 42 1 i 1600 930 765 f 600x1 EOM 600 1 EOM f 600x1 240759 Dimensions HxWxD mm 1600x1240x765 1600x1240x765 1600 1240 765 1600x1240x765 16001240765 1600x1240x765 1600x1240x765 1600x1240x765 Weight kg 23043254325 28143254325 32343254325 32543254325 refrigerant gas pipe inch 15 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 641 3 641 3 641 3 641 3 refrigerant liquid inch 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 Connections j Bean 19 mm 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 Oil equalizing pipe inch 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 mm 64 64 64 64 Compressor RXYQ42MY1B RXYQ44MY1B RXYQ46MY1B RXYQ48 MY1B Oil type Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil 1 9 1 6
69. 6 7 8 Indoor units 1 8 Outdoor unit Refnet header H1 Indoor units 1 8 7 4 3 How to choose an outdoor branch kit needed if the outdoor unit capacity type is RXYQ18 or more W Choose from the following table in accordance with the number of outdoor units 2 unit BHFP22M90 BHFP22M90P 3 unit 22 135 BHFP22M135P 114 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 5 Pipe size selection For an outdoor unit multi installation RXYQ18 48MY1B make the settings in accordance with the following figure Oil equalizing line part D Piping between outdoor branch and indoor unit part C Piping between outdoor branches part B Piping between outdoor unit and refrigerant branch kit part A Piping between outdoor unit and refrigerant branch kit part A m Match to the size of the connection piping on the outdoor unit Outdoor unit connection piping size Unit mm Outdoor unit capacity type Piping size outer diameter Gas pipe Liquid pipe RXYQ5 type 915 9 RXYQ8 type 919 1 09 5 RXYQ10 type 922 2 RXYQ12 14 16 type 912 7 RXYQ18 22 re aus RXYQ24 type RXYQ26 34 type pou RXYQ36 48 type 941
70. 619 1 9 5 250M 022 2 09 5 General Information 137 Si39 303 iagrams D 7 11 1 Outdoor Uni iring 7 11 W RXYQ5MY1B Appendix qgossecode 1v38 1002 HOLTAS 80123135 545 M01 405835 380553 4 52 AYI3H QLL3NOVM ugy j i 3002 83 HOLINS HOSTS SIS THOTH 805035 34055318 SIA Ia NDE MIA A EAA AIAR v92 6128X 0123135 1Y3H 1002 131110 2X3 1 HOISIWH3HI NLA AV138 2L L3NOVR HOLIMS Z ISA ONY 658 158 350 OL MOH H3A09 XOA HOLINS NO 138Y1 NOILNYD NOLLYM3dU OL 833389 PCS 1638 HOLST AV13H 9L L3NDVN 1 13 NOISSINSNVHL 4000110 8000110 71 11 NOISSINSNVUL 3S9WHSIQ 01 00151 JIN HO12V1N02 2113N5YM HOODGLNO HOOGNT OL 9WIHIW NOII23NNO2 VDNVM NOLIVTNISNI 3HL OL 43434 6 N3309 H01 NON 3217836 101 NOLIVTISN 3HL OL Y34334 HOJdYQV 190 JHL 98 50 NIHA P 58 3 ALIA 35108 90 812 HOISINH3HI df MOLDE 43006 3A1123108d b YOLOINNODOO WNIRHSLL LT T 3809 3118434 H31114 35109 div HOLS TAUSHL 1991 90388 42 1314 NOTLOSCNT 3 amp 1YA 1083 105 015153 39NVHO HOL NOM 39 AU3S qNY1L07
71. 70 0 8 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 5 8 15 88 1 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 d Coat the inner and outer surface of the flare with refrigerator oil Ester or ether oil this ensures that the flare nut passes smoothly preventing the pipe from twisting Do not use SUNISO 4GS oil V0980 Important points 1 Burrs should be carefully removed 2 2 spanners should be used to grip the flare nuts 3 The flare nut must be inserted before starting the flaring operation 4 The appropriate amount of torque should be used to tighten the flare nut Standard torques for tightening flare nut 10 Size Torque kgf cm N cm 1 4 6 49 144 176 1420 1720 3 8 9 5 333 407 3270 3990 1 2 12 7 504 616 4950 6030 5 8 15 9 630 770 6180 7540 3 4 19 1 990 1210 9270 11860 5 Check that there is no superficial damage to the surface of the flare 24 General Information Si39 303 Installation Flaring Procedure Clean the inside of the pipe Use a thin stick with a cloth wrapped around it D Cut the pipe using a pipe cutter 2 The cut edge has burrs Before flaring clean the cone section of the flaring The amount of burrs becomes larger when tool the pipe wall is thick Corn section Flare the pipe Rotate the flaring tool 3 or 4 turns after a clicking sound is produced This results in a clean flared surface 5 Remove the burrs using a reamer Apply refri
72. A Attach insulation sleeves Power supply terminal block Grounding wire Retain the ground wires along with the power wires using the accessory clamps 1 Retain the respective power wires L1 L2 L3 and N phases to the bracket individually using the accessory clamps 1 Grounding wire When wiring do not allow the ground wires to contact the compressor lead wires If the wires contact each other adverse effects may occur to other units When connecting two wires to one terminal ensure that the crimp style terminals face with each other back to back Moreover make sure that the wire of the smaller gauge is located above At the same time retain the power wires to the plastic bracket using the accessory clamps 1 Terminal block Crimp style terminal 16 Wire gauge Small Wire gauge Large 18 Plastic bracket Installation Manual 183 Field Wiring Si39 303 In the case RXYQ5 type 1 In the case RXYQ8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 10 type a8 46 RXYQ12 14 16 type Pe Bp
73. A1P to OUT D UNIT 9 T BM DS1 OFF 1234 ABC T Cool heat selector Installation Manual 187 Field Wiring Si39 303 N Caution For low noise operation it is necessary to get the optional External control adaptor for outdoor unit For details see the installation manual attached to the adaptor Picking power line and transmission line m Be sure to let the power line and the transmission line pass through a conduit hole m Pick the power line from the upper hole on the left side plate from the front position of the main unit through the conduit hole of the wiring mounting plate optional parts or from a knock out hole to be made in the unit s bottom plate Electric wiring diagram printed on the back of the electric box lid 1 2 1 AO O 9 10 8 Electric wiring diagram printed the back of the electric box lid Section A Knockout hole Power wiring between outdoor units When the wiring is routed out through the front panel Power wiring between outdoor units Set apart Power wiring between outdoor units When the wiring is routed out through the lateral panel Electric wiring Through cover Cut off the shaded zones before use 188 Installation Manual Si39 303 Field Wiring N Caution Precautions when knocking out knock holes To punch a knock
74. Control and Type Nominal fan motor running current 0 3 0 7 0 7 11 11 14 Model RXYQ18MY1B RXYQ20MY1B RXYQ22MY1B RXYQ24MY1B RXYQ26MY1B RXYQ28MY1B Phase 3N 3N 3N 3N 3N 3N Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 Power supply Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 Voltage torerance 96 10 10 10 10 10 10 Recommended fuses A 50 50 50 60 60 70 Phase 3 3 3 3 3 3 Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 Compressor 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 7 7 8 4 2 8 3 1 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 Nominal running 73 79 7 7 8 4 7 7 8 4 TABA 7 7 8 41 78854 A 4 4 4 8 5 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 current 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 7 7 8 4 2 2 5 77 82 77 84 78 8 5 8 2 8 9 8 4 9 2 4 8 4 9 2 4 DAD ibus UNE 8 2 8 9 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 Voltage V 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 Control and Type Nominal fan motor running current A 0 7x2 0 7x2 0 7 1 1 0 7 1 1 0 7 1 1 1 1x2 Model RXYQ30MY1B 2 1 RXYQ34MY1B RXYQ36MY1B RXYQ38MY1B RXYQ40MY1B Phase 3N 3N 3N 3N 3N 3N Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 Power supply Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 Voltage torerance 96 10 10 10 10 10 10 Recommended fuses A 70 70 90 90 90 100 Phase 3 3 3 3 3 3 Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 Compressor 5209 H 1425 7 7 8 4 7 7 8 4 7 7 8 4 Nominal r
75. Double flow Ceiling mounted cassette type u u m _ Multi flow FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 600x600 Ceiling mounted cassette type FXFQ 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100 125M Multi flow Ceiling mounted __ pie a FXKQ 25M 32M 40M 63M Ceiling mounted built in type FXSQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M ae FXMQ 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M 200M 250M Ceiling FXHQ 32M 63M 100 suspended type Wall mounted ExaQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 68m type FXLQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M Concealed Floor Sending pen 20 25M 32M 40 OM eem Outdoor Units Inverter Series Power Series Model Name Supply Inverter Heat Pump RXYQ 5M 8M 10M 12M 14M 16M 18M 20M 22M 24M 26M Y1B 2 5 Model Name Supply Inverter Heat Pump RXYQ 28M 30M 32M 34M 36M 38M 40M 42M 44M 46M 48M Y1B VE 1 220 240V 50Hz 16 220V 60Hz Y1B 36 380 415V 50Hz 2 General Information Si39 303 Product Outline 1 2 External Appearance 1 2 1 Indoor Units Ce
76. If a knocking sound can be heard in the liquid compression of the compressor stop the unit immediately and then energize the heater for a sufficient length of time before restarting the operation Run each indoor unit one at a time and make sure the corresponding outdoor unit is also running e Check to see if cold or hot air is coming out of the indoor unit Press the fan direction and fan strength buttons on the indoor unit to see if they operate properly W Once stopping the compressor will not restart in about 5 minutes even if the Run Stop button of an indoor unit in the same system is pressed m When the system operation is stopped by the remote controller the outdoor units may continue operating for further 5 minutes at maximum m system has not undergone any check operation by the test operation button since it was first installed an error code is displayed In this case perform check operation referring to 8 2 Test run After the test run when handing the unit over to the customer make sure the electric box lid the service lid and the unit casing are all attached Installation Manual 193 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Si39 303 9 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 Step1 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Introduction Points to note in connection with refrigerant leaks The installer and system specialist shall secure safety against leakage accordin
77. LIQUID SIDE PIPE GAS SIDE PIPE OIL PIPE GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 attaching outdoor unit lt CAUTION A 195 Standard 240mm Be sure connect liquid side pipe with outdoor unit less than 143mm Fig 3 lt A front view gt General Information 121 Si39 303 Appendix e BHFP22M135 n case of using gas side attached pipe 3 attaching outdoor unit the following A size is 195 240mn lt A upper viewo 1 IPE 3 10010 SIDE P tattaching outdoor unit lt ns Ge A 195 Standard 240mm Fig 10 Be sure connect liquid side pipe with Outdoor unit less than 143mm lt A front view Installation of W Cutting the Reducer 1 and Gas Side Attached Pipe 3 Gas Side Pipes According the following table cut the reduser 1 and gas side attached pipe 3 02215 no use Table 6 GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 Attaching outdoor unit Capacity index of outdoor units A mm REDUSER 1 TO GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 300 350 1 400 z 5 lt 300 350 400 cutting msitin p TO GAS SIDE JOINT W Connection Piping e BHFP22M90 e Connect gas side pipe with gas side joint Refer to Fig 4 According the JNATALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit brazing the refrigerant piping GAS SIDE ATTACHED 1 2 Attaching outdoor unit Dutdoor unit a GAS SIDE ATTACHE
78. M 49 Picking power line and transmission line 188 Ceiling Suspended Type FXHQ M 50 Pipe Insulation 177 Floor Standing Concealed Floor Standing Type Pipe size selection 115 FXLQ M 52 Piping Diameter for Grouped Drain Pipes 40 Wall Mounted Type FXAQ M 51 Piping Installation 108 Drain AE ede eee 38 The Example of A Wrong Pattern 109 Piping System Diagrams E 137 Electrical Specifications 160 Piping System Diagrams Outdoor Unit 134 Electrical Work u sn 52 Power Circuit and Cable Requirements 181 Excessive noise due to incorrect angling of Power Supply 53 REFNET joints L 148 Power supply connection 192 External 3 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410 222 Pressure down despite absence of leaks during air tight test 147 Index i Si39 303 Program Dry 209 Programming Start and Stop of the System With TIMEN Sa rd et eo me
79. NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG Room 10 G NG Room 11 G Room 12 G NG Room 13 Room 14 0 Room 15 G Room 16 NG Refrigerant Room 17 G NG 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room 20 G NG 9 Gas detector No leaks system Room 21 G NG Room22 G NG Room 23 G NG Room 24 G NG Room 25 G 26 G Room 27 G NG Room28 G NG Room 29 G Room 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG 34 G NG Room35 G NG Room 36 G NG Room 37 38 G NG 39 G 40 G NG Room 1 G Room 2 G NG Room 3 G NG Room 4 G NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG Room 10 G NG Room 11 G NG Room 12 G NG Room 13 G NG Room 14 G Room 15 G NG Room 16 NG Indoor Air filter Visual No clogging or Room 17 G NG Room 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room 20 G NG unit inspection damage Room 21 G NG Room 22 G NG Room 23 G NG Room24 G NG Room 25 G NG 26 G NG Room 27 G Room28 G NG Room 29 G Room 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG 34 G NG Room35 G NG Room 36 G NG Room 37 G 38 G NG Room 39 G 40 G NG Room 1 G 2 G NG 3 G Room 4 G NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG Room 10 G NG Room 11 G NG Room 12 G NG Room 13 G NG Room 14 G Room 15 G NG Room 16 NG i i
80. Open the stop valves on the liquid and the gas pipes to the full n Note X Vacuums should be produced in both the liquid and the gas pipes Because there are a large number of functional components in the indoor unit which cut off the vacuum mid way through Standard vacuum drying time chart 0 05MPa Rising pressure Atmospheric pressure 0 MPa 200mmHg 4 Falling pressure vacuum 400 600 700 760 Additional refrigerant Vacuum Maintained N Charge drying vacuum test i 2 hours 1 hours Time required approx 3 hours V0991 34 General Information Si39 303 Installation Special vacuum drying This vacuum drying method is selected when there is a suspicion that there may be moisture in the pipes For example When moisture was discovered during the refrigerant pipe flushing operation When there is a risk of condensation forming inside the pipes during periods of heavy rainfall When there is a risk of condensation forming inside the pipes due to a long term of works When there is a risk that rainwater may have entered the pipes during installation The special vacuum drying method is the same as the standard method except that nitrogen is introduced into the pipes to break the vacuum on one or more occasions during the course of the operation Operational steps 1 2 Vacuum drying 1st time 2 hours Vacuum breaking 1st time Use
81. Room 17 G NG Room 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room 20 G NG Heat exchanger Visual No clogging or inspection damage Room21 G NG 22 G NG Room 23 G NG Room24 G NG Room 25 Room 26 G NG Room 27 G NG Room28 G NG Room 29 G Room 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room33 G NG Room 34 G NG Room35 G NG Room 36 G NG Room 37 G 38 G 39 G 40 G NG 130 General Information Si39 303 Appendix Inspection item Inspection method Standard guideline Measurement values Decision Room 1 G NG Room 2 G NG Room 3 G NG Room 4 NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG 10 G NG Room 11 G NG Room 12 G Room 13 G NG Room 14 G NG Room 15 G NG Room 16 G NG Fan motor 500 V Room 17 G NG 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room20 G NG electrical 1 MQ or more insulation megatester Room21 G NG 22 G NG Room23 G NG Room 24 G NG Room 25 G NG Room 26 G NG Room 27 G NG Room 28 G NG Room 29 G NG 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG Room 34 G 35 G NG Room36 G NG Room 37 G NG Room 38 G NG 39 G NG Room 40 G NG Room 1 G NG Room 2 G NG Room 3 G NG Room 4 G NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG
82. SATWA 1083105 SPAT d2 WOSNIS IN3MM12 40151538 CE TH 1631 38vd3 d LA LA SWINE SVO HJA13938 3A1YA 1013 SEAT dtv H0SN3S IN3HM02 90151538 OTH 910 ONVHO YOLINON 91 85 9 110119 d8 dlH C10 100 3ATVA 11013 SZA dev ONILINIT LN3u802 80151938 H 919 VOL 105235 ne 7113 5 9 108 3A1VA 1083 dI LINOUID 123130 TVSU3A3H 3SVHd dul dv V9 11005 35 lt JAVA NOTSNVdX3 21840412313 32 31A 99 9909 E3MOd ONTHOLINS Sd H3IY3H ASVOANVUD 282 40 1090 CI0INO2 41115 TWNINUAL WIX NWS HOLOW JIN HOLIMS d 2 1150 114405 04 41815 TWNINUSL WIX 14055354402 HOLOW Z IN 92 HO119VdV 12 9 42V 31000W H3MOd 109 UZA 12Y3 13538 1531 135 3004 ZV 390148 30010 HIA HO1dV V NOILdO AY134 2I13NOVW EEIE div HOlIMS NOLIN HSld S lS 5101531 1335 JILA 9H23 AY134 2L3NDYN COSMOS 1838802 HYO 1102812 CIN 107 1017 072 H3WMOJSNVHI 91 H3 AV13H 2LL3NDYN QBITI 35104 1408 1112912 iN 99 HOSN3S IN3HU02 VII 91 SLA AY134 9LL3NOVN ubi UVO 110281 CAIN HOH HOLIMS 34055384 HdZ 4415 41 9 JLLINIYN EES CANT 808 110281 2 N01 HOSN3S 380553244 14815 91 AVI3H 9LL3NOVM 110281 OJIN div 1 1 1 11 X08 HOLIMS O98 23 13 100pU IJ 417
83. When Thermostat is OFF Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset If switching the filter sign ON time set as given in the table below Set Time Filter Specs Standard Long Life Ultra Long Life Filter Setting Contamination Light 200 hrs 2 500 hrs 10 000 hrs Contamination Heavy 100 hrs 1 250 hrs 5 000 hrs When a Ultra long life filter is installed the filter sign timer setting must be changed Setting Table Mode No Setting Switch No Setting Position No Setting 10 20 1 01 Long Life Filter 02 Ultra Long Life Filter 1 03 By setting to Set Fan Speed you can switch the fan speed to the set fan speed when the heating thermostat is OFF Since there is concern about draft if using fan speed up when thermostat is OFF you should take the setup location into consideration Setting Table Mode No First Code No Second Code No Setting 12 22 3 01 LL Fan Speed 02 Set Fan Speed For the air conditioners with no setting for the function same as factory setting the units will be left in the stop condition when the power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply is turned on again after once turned off However for the air conditioners with the setting the units may start automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply turned on again return to the same operation condition
84. a minimum Use of an If a drain pan made of polystyrene foam is used then an auxiliary drain hose flexible is also essential A Auxiliary Drain flexible drain hose permits the drain socket and drain pipe to be connected without difficulty and prevents Hose Flexible any undue strain being placed on the drain pan Indoor unit Metal clamp Auxiliary drain hose Thermal insulation drain pipe area sn i Sees sop asss 1 Drain pan Thermal insulation band area I V1005 Hanger pitch 1 1 5m Hanger Indoor unit Indoor units Use widest diameter possible Gradient of 1 100 or more Insulation material V1006 Important points 1 The drain pipe should be at least equal in size to that of the indoor unit 2 The drain pipe is thermally insulated to prevent the formation of condensation inside the pipe 3 The drain up mechanism should be fitted before the indoor unit is installed and when the electricity has been connected some water should be added to the drain pan and the drain pump checked to see that it is functioning correctly 4 All connections should be secure Special care is needed with PVC pipe The use of a colored adhesive with PVC pipes will help you to remember to connect them up General Information 39 Installation Si39 303 Piping Diameter for Grouped Drain Pipes Notes Notes 1 Select piping diameter from the below tab
85. a code Fill in the location of each indoor unit Group indoor units controlled by one or two remote controllers group or individual control Assign central group Nos if using centralized control Add field settings and optional equipment for indoor units Add unit No if making separate field settings for each indoor unit under group control readout unit Nos after activating the power Example System list With the VRV Il R410A Heat Pump Series unit No is determined through automatic addressing therefore Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit Model Name Remote Centralized Optional code Field Settings Model Name System Location Controller Control Group Unit No equipment field Group No settings etc Seal cas FXCQ32M 2F01 eng foor A 1 00 Indoor unit Low noise FXSQ63M 2F02 1 00 operation orice RXYQ16M L N O P 2nd floor PAC1 Individual control FXCQ40M 2F03 office A 1 00 Sequential start 2ndfl ON Defrost FXHQ63M 2 04 B 1 01 Earlier Sequential start 2nd floor No FXCQ50M 2F05 office B 1 01 oes FXSQ32M 3F01 C 1 02 Indoor unit 3rd fl Low noise FXCQ40M 3F02 Bales 1 02 operation mE RXYQ18M L N O P 3nd floor PAC2 Individual control FXSQ40M 3F03 office C 1 02 Sequential start ard fl ON Defrost FXCQ50M 3F04 es D 1 03 Earlier For details on field settings and centralized control group No
86. and the refrigerant branch kit Select the proper pipe size based on the total capacity 300 350 index of outdoor units Table 7 400 428 6 Ly Total capacity index Pipe size Unit of outdoor units LIQUID Between the connection piping kit and the connection piping kit Select the proper pipe size based on the total capacity 255 19 1 index Of upper side outdoor units Table 8 900 amp X 41 3 IET n Total capacity index Pipe size Unit mm of outdoor units LIQUID 500 554 550 628 6 615 9 1 0 6343 Cut the pipe with a pipe cutter 120 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 7 1 In case of Front Piping Illustration External e BHFP22M90 Outdoor unit A GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 Attaching autdoor unit VERE e BHFP22M135 GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 Attaching outdoor unit REDUSER 1 Outdoor unit C LIQUID SIDE JOINT 1 A A NN d 4 GAS SIDE JOINT 1 24 GAS SIDE PIPE Field supply L1QUID SIDE PIPE Field supply SW GAS SIDE JOINT 2 i LIQUID SIDE JOINT 2 OIL PIPE JOINT d GAS SIDE PIPE Field supply JIOINT Field supply LIQUID SIDE PIPE Field supply OIL PIPE Field supply Fig 9 e BHFP22M90 n case of using gas side attached pipe 3 attaching outdoor unit the following A size is 195 240mn lt A upper view
87. back to the first mode TEST Terminal board 220V 240V single phase power suppl Electric parts box lid V0622 W Youcan check whether drainage is satisfactory or not by removing the access opening lid and checking the water level of the drain pan through the access opening m Becareful when doing so because the fan is turning at the same time Access opening Close V0623 42 General Information Si39 303 Installation Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FXFQ M Multi flow Note Rig drain piping Lay pipes so as to ensure that drainage can occur with no problems Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger excluding the raising section than that of the connecting pipe PVC pipe nominal diameter 25 mm outside diameter 32 mm m Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1 100 to prevent air pockets from forming m f the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope execute the drain raising piping To keep the drain hose from sagging space hanging wires every 1 to 1 5 m gt Hanger bracket el m 1 100 gradient or more vs 5 4 WRONG Fig 18 Fig 19 m Use the attached drain hose 1 and clamp 2 Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base and tighten the clamp securely within the portion o
88. blinks Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete 4 2 2 When Turning On Power The Second Time and Subsequent Tap the RESET button on the outdoor unit PC board Operation becomes possible for about 2 minutes If you do not push the RESET button the unit cannot be run for up to 10 minutes to automatically set master power Status Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P Blinks Can also be set during operation described above Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above the operation lamp lights but the compressor does not operate Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete 4 2 3 When an Indoor Unit or Outdoor unit Has Been Added or Indoor or Outdoor Unit PC Board Has Been Changed Be sure to push and hold the RESET button for 5 seconds If not the addition cannot be recognized In this case the unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the address indoor outdoor address etc Status Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P ON Can also be set during operation described above Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above the UH or U4 malfunction indicator blinks Returns to normal when automatic setting is complete N Caution When the 400 volt power supply is applyed to N phase by mistake replace Inverter P C B A2P and control transformer T1R T2R in switch box together V0847
89. eoeeooe 3 minutes Y Step 7 Pump down residual operation e0060000 5 minutes Y Step 8 Standby for restarting 0900000 5 minutes Y Completion General Information 101 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Si39 303 5 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 Step1 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Introduction Points to note in connection with refrigerant leaks The installer and system specialist shall secure safety against leakage according to local regulations or standards The following standards may be applicable if local regulations are not available Maximum Concentration Level The maximum charge of refrigerant and the calculation of the maximum concentration of refrigerant is directly related to the humanly occupied space in to which it could leak The unit of measurement of the concentration is kg m the weight in kg of the refrigerant gas in 1m volume of the occupied space Compliance to the local applicable regulations and standards of the maximum allowable concentration level is required In Australia the maximum allowed concentration level of refrigerant to a humanly space is limited to 0 35kg m for RA07C and 0 44kg m for R410A O tdoor nit Direction of refrigerant flow gt n Room where Ind i NY refrigerant leak has negor n 59 occurred Outflow t j of all the refrigerant in system Pay speci
90. etc 2 Tohave acurrent tolerance of 125 or more of the rated current in cases where the rated current of the apparatus is 50A or less 3 have a current tolerance of 110 or more of the rated current in cases where the rated current of the apparatus is more than 50A 4 To satisfy voltage drop standards e Separation of control and power supply cables m If control and power cables are run alongside each other then there is a strong likelihood of operational faults developing due to interference in the signal wiring caused by electrostatic and electromagnetic coupling The table below indicates our recommendations as to the appropriate spacing of control and power cables where these are to be run side by side Current capacity of power cable Spacing d 10A or less 300mm 50A 500mm 100V or more 100A 1000mm 100A or more 1500mm The figures are based on an assumed length of parallel cabling up to 100m For lengths in excess of 100m the figures will have to be recalculated in direct proportion to the additional length of cable involved 2 If the power supply waveform continues to exhibit some distortion the recommended spacing in the table should be increased If the cables are laid inside conduits then the following points must also be taken into account when grouping various cables together for introduction into the conduits 1 Power cables including power supply to the air conditioner
91. gt eae 4 bud ID y 2 ii tee ti 150 Ex 60 300 2 iH He AL 5 1 11 tt tt rt tt tt 610 m eho he eae San 5 L Dg 12 1 6 104 6 4 145 A mos 120 ji 120 2x 60 120 6 L 069 5 615 BRATS i NE 1 06 12 7 2 1 0 12 7 S IEEE ie aie SIR SS eI a eo 42 KHRP26M72H Gas Side ae Insulation Liquid Side Insulation ME T P m HD SL ge UE pera xor RP NU SERRE Css ao EN Abr br rdi rd ssh Im 140 5x 60 300 3 1 Oy 1 1 Y 1 360 Emm I uu Lu ui LA Huy tH Un 6 1 D 6 4 185 2x 160 320 2 1 06 12 1 265 2x 160 320 60 60 61 0385 F 3 106 12 1 3 104 12 1 f 1 06 12 1 0 12 Son ie Se eS on See A l i in ka 1 0415 9 7 2 K B KHRP26M73H Gas Side Insulation Liquid Side Insulation 106318 EUER es oe verdict ict l R IHIIHI ih IHI B a i xit tn ie od 710 LEN Lat T ET 165 5x 80 400 80 80 E a lo G ALLA TW e sh Ps nam aa 1 06 15 9 lara sa j e E E gt LDg 19 1 1 09222 00819 V3049 KHRP26M73HP 349 413 Reducing Socket 2 170 120 ee V3050 General Information 127 Appendix Si39 303 REFNET Joint and 1 REFNET
92. hole hit on it with a hammer After knocking out the holes we recommend you paint the edges and areas around the edges using the repair paint to prevent rusting When passing electrical wiring through the knock holes remove any burrs from the knock holes and wrap the wiring with protective tape to prevent damage A Knockout hole V If there are any possibilities that Burr small animals enter the system through the knock holes plug the holes with packing materials to be prepared onsite Use a power wire pipe for the power wiring Outside the unit make sure the weak electric wiring i e for the remote control between units etc and the strong electric wiring do not pass near each other keeping them at least 50 mm apart Proximity may cause electrical interference malfunctions and breakage Be sure to connect the power wiring to the power wiring terminal block and secure it as described in 7 4 Field line connection Inter unit wiring should be secured as described in 7 4 Field line connection Secure the wiring with the accessory clamps so that it does not touch the piping Make sure the wiring and the electric box lid do not stick up above the structure and close the cover firmly Never connect 200V to the terminal block of the interconnecting wiring Doing so will break the entire system The wiring from the indoor units must be connected to the F1 F2 In Out terminals on the
93. i lt 40m 112 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 4 Refrigerant branch kit selection Refrigerant branch kits can only be used with R410A 7 4 1 How to select the refnet joint m When using refnet joints at the first branch counted from the outdoor unit side Choose from the following table in accordance with the capacity of the outdoor unit Outdoor unit capacity type Refrigerant branch kit name RXYQ5 type KHRP26M22T RXYQ8 10type KHRP26M33T RXYQ12 22 type KHRP26M72T RXYQ24 type KHRP26M73T KHRP73TP m For refnet joints other than the first branch select the proper branch kit model based on the total capacity index of downstream indoor units Indoor capacity index Refrigerant branch kit name lt 200 KHRP26M22T 200 lt X lt 290 KHRP26M33T 290 lt X lt 640 KHRP26M72T 640 lt KHRP26M73T KHRP73TP of downstream indoor units 1 example in case of refnet joint C indoor units 3 4 5 6 7 8 Outdoor unit REFNET joint C Indoor units 1 8 2 example in case of refnet joint B indoor units 7 8 example in case of refnet joint header indoor units 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 mn Outdoor unit REFNET joint B k E Reinet header
94. joint Header Installation Gas line and liquid line branch pipe Tothe branch pipe or OUT 1 45 5 to the indoor unit X Field pipe Field pipes IN OUT 2 To outdoor unit 224 Gas line and liquid line branch pipe Optional accessories V1084 m Ifthe selected building pipe differs form the branch pipe in size cut the connection with a pipe cutter as shown below o oa ep gt I m Install the branch pipe either vertically or horizontally V1085 NC gt lt Install within 30 angle or vertically N View as seen from A c e V1086 m Insulate the branch pipe as described in the kit installation manual 2 REFNET header Gas line branch pipe Liquid line branch pipe Field pipe Field pipe Field pipe Field pipe 227 Toindoorunits 0 4 To indoor units Gas line branch pipe Vestib Liquid line branch pipe To outdoor unit optional accessory optional accessory V1087 m f the selected field pipe differs from the branch pipe in size cut the connection with a pipe cutter as shown below qviose Fit astop end on all open branch pipe connections not in use attached with kit Stop end B attached with kit V1089 m Install the branch pipe horizontally Horizontal line View as seen from B V1090 m Insulate the branch pipe as described in the kit installation manual Install the REFNET joint horizontally or vertically
95. made in Setting mode 2 m Mode changing procedure Using the MODE button the modes can be changed as follows Push and hold the BS1 Normal Push the BS1 MODE button MODE button for 5 seconds one time Setting mode 2 Setting mode 1 Monitor mode MODE Push the BS1 MODE button one time MODE MODE O On Off P Blinking H1P H1P H1P V2761 m Mode changing procedure Set Select mode with BS2 SET button in each selection step Press BS1 MODE button for more than 5 sec Setting mode 1 Press BS1 MODE button Initial condition Setting mode 2 Monitor mode m gt Setting item selection Set Check item selection Set Press BS3 Press BS3 RETURN button RETURN button Setting condition selection Set Contents display Press BS3 Press BS3 y RETURN button RETURN button Setting condition Contents display Press BS3 RETURN button Press BS1 MODE button Press BS1 MODE button Y V2762 80 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation a Setting mode 1 Normally Setting mode 1 is set In case of other status push MODE button BS1 one time and set to Setting mode 1 lt Selection of setting items gt
96. maximum 10 minutes of defrost operation the system returns to heating operation again Hot start m In order to prevent cold air from blowing out of an indoor unit at the start of heating operation the indoor fan is automatically stopped The display of the remote controller shows 6 Zb 208 Operation Manual Si39 303 Operation Procedure 6 2 Program Dry Operation n Notes Notes W The function of this program is to decrease the humidity in your room with a minimum temperature decrease m The micro computer automatically determines temperature and fan speed W The system does not go into operation if the room temperature is low For systems without cool heat changeover remote control switch RXYQ series REYQ series Seu HT EM 2 c3 Press the operation mode selector button several times and select 4 program dry operation Press the on off button The operation lamp lights up and the system starts operation Press the air flow direction adjust button only for EXC FXF FXH FXK FXA Refer to the chapter Adjusting the air flow direction for details Stopping the system tr Press the on off button once again The operation lamp goes off and the system stops operation W Do notturn off power immediately
97. nitrogen to raise pressure to 0 05MPa Since the nitrogen gas used to break the vacuum is dry nitrogen this process serves only to enhance the overall drying effect of the vacuum drying operation itself However since the effectiveness of this process is severely impaired by a high moisture level inside the pipes the utmost care is required during installation to see that water does not enter or form inside the refrigerant pipes Vacuum drying 2nd time Operate the vacuum pump for at least 1 hour Observations Degree of vacuum has reached 5 mmHg If the degree of vacuum has not reached 5 mmHg after 2 hours or more then repeat the operations at 2 vacuum breaking and 3 vacuum drying above Carry out maintained vacuum test 1 hour Additional charge of refrigerant Open stop valve to the full The gas used for the vacuum breaking operation must be nitrogen The use of oxygen brings a serious risk of explosions Special vacuum drying time chart 0 05MPa Rising pressure Atmospheric _ Pressure 0 200mmHg V Falling pressure vacuum 400 600 100 160 QU ILI 95 956 3 o 5 2 c 2 a Om 5 d E o 3 c E gt 8 5 5 3 8 E 3 s a 5 gt o oO oO lt 5 gt gt Time required approx 4 hous 0994 General Information 35 Installation Si39 303 3 2 7 Additio
98. pressure equalizer m Not insulating them may cause leaking gas piping can reach temperatures of 120 C Be sure the insulation used can withstand such temperatures m If you think the humidity around the cooling piping might exceed 30 C and RH80 reinforce the insulation on the cooling piping at least 20mm thick Condensation might form on the surface of the insulation m If there is a possibility that condensation on the shut off valve might drip down into the indoor unit through gaps in the insulation and piping because the outdoor unit is located higher than the indoor unit etc this must be prevented by corking the connections etc One outdoor unit installed When multiple outdoor units installed 1 RXYQ5 16MY1B 8 RXYQ18 48MY1B 1 One outdoor unit installed 2 Liquid line shutoff valve 3 Gas line shutoff valve 4 Outer to inner interconnecting piping 5 Calking treatment etc 6 Heat insulator 7 Oil equalizing line shutoff valve 8 When multiple outdoor units installed N Caution sure to insulate local pipes as touching them can cause burns Installation Manual 177 Si39 303 6 6 Additional refrigerant charge Caution Notes Refrigerant cannot be charged until field wiring has been completed Refrigerant may only be charged after performing the leak test and the vacuum drying see above When charging a system care shall be taken that its maximum permissible charge is nev
99. refer to the installation manual and system reference materials 12 General Information Si39 303 Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design Step 2 The following sequence should be followed in order to prepare control circuit diagrams in accordance with Preparation of the the system list which has already been completed Control Circuit Diagrams should be prepared for each individual outdoor unit The outdoor unit model number should Diagrams be inserted into the diagram RXYQ16M Insert name of refrigerant system PAC1 PAC2 3 Insert name of indoor unit 2 gt 2 4 Insert system name of indoor unit Insert installation position Do this when demarcation is possible 6 Insert remote controller control wiring Group Indicated by solid line Solid line 7 Insert centralized control wiring Dotted line Insert Group No G No for each indoor unit with U No O The control circuit diagrams are now complete Example Control circuit diagram Example Control circuit diagram TALI C RXYQ16M RXxYQi8M RxYQieM D lt C y 2 1 00 2F03 1 01 2F04 1 01 2F05 1 02 3F01 1 02 3F03 1 02 3F02 1 03 3F04 1 04 1 05 4F01 4F02 Centralized group No 1 00 1 00 4 System nam
100. than 3 0 m Lower than 3 3 m Lower than 3 8 m 03 Higher Ceiling S Lower than 3 5 m Lower than 3 5 m Inthe Case of FXFQ100 125 Mode First Second Ceiling height No code code Setting 4 way Outlets 3 way Outlets 2 way Outlets 01 Standard N Lower than 3 2 m Lower than 3 6 m Lower than 4 2 m 13 23 0 02 High Ceiling H Lower than 3 6 Lower than 4 0 m Lower than 4 2 m 03 Higher Ceiling S Lower than 4 2 Lower than 4 2 m Set the air flow direction of indoor units as given in the table below Set when optional air outlet blocking pad has been installed The second code No is factory set to 01 Setting Table Mode No First Code No Second Code Setting No 13 23 1 01 F 4 direction air flow 02 T 3 direction air flow 03 W 2 direction air flow Only the model FXKQ has the function When only the front flow is used sets yes no of the swing flap operation of down flow Setting Table Setting Mode No First Code No Second Code No Down flow operation Yes 13 23 3 01 Down flow operation No 02 General Information 73 Test Operation Si39 303 Setting of Air Make the following air flow direction setting according to the respective purpose Flow Direction Adjustment Range 2 52537 Setting Table Mode No First Code No
101. the attached sealing pad over the clamp and drain hose to insu late Insulate the drain hose inside the building While referring to the figure on the right insulate the clamp and drain hose with the attached large sealing pad If the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope execute the drain raising piping Secure a downward gradient of 1 100 or more for the drain pipe To accomplish this mount supporting brackets at an interval of 1 1 5 m Precautions when doing drain up piping work Make sure the drain up piping is at most 330 mm high Stand the drain up piping horizontally and make sure it is not further than 300 mm from the base of the drain socket 7 Ceiling slab 77 gt Support bracket Adjustable lt 330 Riser Le 2 Clamp metal attached Drain hose attached lt 500 170 Use the following outline if laying concentrated drain piping If converging multiple drain pipes install according to the procedure shown below L z T joint converging drain pipes 2100mm Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit 2 After piping work is finished check drainage flows smoothly Open the inspection opening add approximately 1000 cc of water slowly into the drain pan and check drainage flow Inspection ope
102. the humidifier as the indoor unit 3 2 9 Drain Piping for Each Model Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FXCQ M Double flow Rig drain piping The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the diameter of the connecting pipe vinyl tube pipe size 25 mm outer dimension 32 mm Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1 100 to prevent air pockets from forming If the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope execute the drain raising piping To keep the drain hose from sagging space hanging wires every 1 to 1 5 m Hanger bracket 3X No Good V0615 Vost Use the attached drain hose and clamp metal Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the white tape Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4mm from the hose Wrap the attached sealing pad over the clamp and drain hose to insulate 40 General Information Installation Si39 303 m Insulate the drain hose inside the building Large sealing pad Clamp metal attached attached Clamp metal 59 7 2 7 Drain hose Tape White 4mm or less V0617 osi PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING m Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 310 mm m Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit Ceiling slab Z 300 mm or less Hanger bracket A
103. the normal mode 9 ROI When setting the filter sign time to Filter Dirtiness High in all group unit setting set the Mode No to 10 Mode setting No to 0 and setting position No to 02 68 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 1 3 Simplified Remote Controller BRC2A51 SECOND CODE NO BS4 BS6 57 BS8 BS9 BS10 V1405 Group No setting by simplified remote controller Remove the cover of remote controller While in normal mode press the BS6 BUTTON field set to enter the FIELD SET MODE Select the mode No 00 with BS2 BUTTON temperature setting A and BS3 BUTTON temperature setting Y Select the group No with BS9 BUTTON set A and BS10 BUTTON set B Group Nos increase in the order of 1 00 1 01 1 15 2 00 4 15 However the unified ON OFF controller displays only group No set within the range of control Press BS7 BUTTON set cancel to set group No Press BS6 BUTTON field set to return to the NORMAL MODE General Information 69 Test Operation Si39 303 4 4 1 4 Setting Contents and Code No VRV Unit VRV system indoor unit settings Mode Setting Setting Contents Second Code No Note 3 No Switch Not
104. to be carried out Make inspection holes for model which need them Fit the unit to ensure proper drainage O Example Ceiling mounted cassette type FXCQ63M or more pi F P 100 or more or more or more Z V0962 16 General Information Si39 303 Installation 3 2 3 Refrigerant Pipe Work The 3 Principles of Refrigerant Piping W Operational steps Fit pipes Install indoor unit mmm Cut pipes to size wmp provisionally m Replace nitrogen wp mm Solder Flushing mj Air tight test Vacuum drying The 3 principles of refrigerant piping must be strictly observed V0963 Cause of problem Actoin to avoid problem Rainwater work water etc gets into pipes from outside Moisture generated inside pipes due to condensation Dry Y Pipe covering Ed Flushing Vacuum drying Formation of oxides inside pipes during soldering Replace nitrogen 5 msj Flushin Dirt dust or other mg extraneous material gets gt Pipe covering into pipes from outside Leak from soldered area Use the proper materials copper pipe solder etc Adhere strictly to standar
105. unstable and the terminal relay cease to function Reduced voltage The control system may become unduly subject to noise interference b When cable more than 1 25 mm is used When wiring indoor units together the terminal block will not be able to accommodate 2 cables simultaneously if the cables are larger than 1 25 mme V1036 c For multi core cable The greater play between wires the more the transmitted wave is distorted and transmission destabilized 52 General Information Si39 303 Installation d In the case of a remote controller with a three way selector for cooling heating and ventilation twin core cable should be used when the ventilation mode is not required and three core cable should be used when three way selection is required e Since there is a considerable risk of mixing high 220 to 240V and low voltage in the case of for example a PCB for remote control multiple core cable must not be used Internal wiring regulations and dielectric strengths of cables are relevant here Example of incorrect method Example of correct method Operate stop 6 core cable Operate stop gt Other important points 1 The refrigerant circuit and the indoor outdoor connecting cables must correspond exactly 2 A suitable gap must be left between the control cables and the power supply cables where these laid alongside each other See Separation of control and power supply cables on pa
106. 015 9 13 5 16 5 wrench 23 27 115439 62 75 6 mm 22 2 Hexagonal 27 33 wrench 36 44 z 22 28 25 4 10 mm 1 1 Service port 2 Cap 3 Hexagon hole 4 Shaft 5 Seal W Always use a charge hose for service port connection After tightening the cap check that no refrigerant leaks are present m When loosening a flare nut always use two wrenches in combination When connecting the piping always use a spanner and torque wrench in combination to tighten the flare nut m When connecting a flare nut coat the flare inner and outer faces Torque wrench with etheral oil or ester oil and hand tighten the nut 3 to 4 turns as the initial tightening Spanner Piping union Flare shape and flare nut tightening torque Pleven lt Precautions when connecting pipes gt W See the following table for flare part machining dimensions 12 7 or greater When loosening a flare nut always use two wrenches in combination When connecting the piping always use a spanner and torque wrench in combination to tighten the flare nut m 46 4 9 7 Tighten with one torque wrench within the set torque Do not use two wrenches because this might cause the refrigerant to leak m Use ester oil or ether oil m See the following table for tightening torque Applying too much torque may cause the flares to crack Installation Manual Si39 303 m After all the piping has been connected use nitrogen to perform a gas l
107. 1 4 f 22 24 26HP 28 30 32HP RXYQ34M 36M RXYQ38M 40M 42M I E i a E E F T at 71 F E f 7 s 34 36HP 38 40 42HP RXYQ44M 46M 48M 44 46 48HP General Information Si39 303 Product Outline 1 3 Combination of Outdoor Units Module System Capacity Number of units 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 18 48HP are realized by combining 8 10 12 14 and 16HP General Information 5 Product Outline Si39 303 1 4 Model Selection VRV Il Heat Pump Series Connectable indoor units number and capacity HP 5HP 8HP 10HP 12HP 14HP 16HP System name RXYQ5M RXYQ8M RXYQ10M RXYQ12M RXYQ14M RXYQ16M Outdoor unit 1 RXYQ5M RXYQ8M RXYQ10M RXYQ12M RXYQ14M RXYQ16M Outdoor unit 2 Outdoor unit 3 Total number of connectable indoor units 8 13 16 19 20 20 Total capacity of connectable indoor units kW 7 0 18 2 11 2 29 1 14 0 36 4 16 8 43 6 20 0 52 0 22 5 58 5 HP 18HP 20HP 22HP 24HP 26HP 28HP System name RXYQ18M RXYQ20M RXYQ22M RXYQ24M RXYQ26M RXYQ28M Outdoor unit 1 RXYQ8M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ12M Outdoor unit 2 RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ12M RXYQ1
108. 1 Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain waste water from around the unit 2 f the unit is to be installed on a roof check the strength of the roof and its drainage facilities first 3 If the unit is to be installed on a frame install the waterproofing board within a distance of 150mm under the unit in order to prevent infiltration of water coming from under the unit Precaution m Wheninstalling on a roof make sure the roof floor is strong enough and be sure to water proof all work m Make sure the area around the machine drains properly by setting up drainage grooves around the foundation Drain water is sometimes discharged from the outdoor unit when it is running Block all gaps in the holes for passing out piping and wiring using sealing material locally procured Small animals may enter the machine 60 General Information Si39 303 Installation AN Caution Caution label Ex passing piping out through the front 1 Plug the areas marked with 2 When the piping is routed from the front panel 2 Gas side piping 3 Liquid side piping To the installer CDRemove the screws bes A w to remove the front panel pressing the front panel with your hands and slide the panel downward The panel stops by the stopper Pull the casing forward with Your hands For 8 amp 10 TYPE and slide the panel downward For 5 amp
109. 1 04 V0917 N Caution When turning the power supply on the unit may often not accept any operation while 88 is displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal display This is not an operative fault 76 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 1 8 Setting of Operation Control Mode from Remote Controller Local Setting The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting the functions of the operation remote controller Furthermore operations such as remote controller ON OFF can be limited in accordance with the combination conditions Refer to information in the table below Centralized controller is normally available for operations Except when centralized monitor is connected 4 4 1 9 Contents of Control Modes Twenty modes consisting of combinations of the following five operation modes with temperature and operation mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0 through 19 ON OFF control impossible by remote controller Used when you want to turn on off by central remote controller only Cannot be turned on off by remote controller OFF control only possible by remote controller Used when you want to turn on by central remote controller only and off by remote controller only Centralized Used when you want to turn on by central remote controller only and turn on o
110. 1 2 Faint Noises and Correcting Operating Noise with Respect to Faint Noises Faint noises are defined as peripheral sounds existing while the unit is not running which are picked up when measuring operating noise If these faint noises are 10 dB or more than the noise produced by the unit the measured value can be taken as the operating noise of the unit But the difference must be corrected if less than 10 dB because of the effect these noises have on the actual measured value Also when the sound meter remains unchanged even while the unit is stopped we can determine the operational noise to be at least 10 dB less than the faint noises but we cannot pinpoint the operating noise exactly For example if the faint noises are some 65 dB and the noise produced by the unit in operation is 70 dB the indicated difference comes to 5 dB Using Table 3 we recommend you correct the operating noise by about 2 dB to 68 dB Table 3 Correcting the effect of faint noises Unit dB Difference between when noise is produced and when not I 2 3 4 6 T 8 9 10 Corrective Value 6 9 4 4 3 0 2 3 1 7 1 25 0 95 0 75 0 60 0 45 7 1 3 Calculating Operating Noise When two or more units are running at the same time the amount of operating noise they produce rises The total amount of noise produced can be obtained ahead of time with Chart 4
111. 10 8000100 24 13 NOISSINSNYE 770 uis in n 3 2 IET T HOOGLNO HOOGNT 01 DNIYTA NOII23NNO 804 IYNNYN NOLLVTTVISNI 3Hl OL 43434 G B NOLLYTIVISN 3Hl 01 43334 DLdVOY NOILdO 3Hl NISN Y usauosay 35 5 HIN 3510N JIZ 1011215 HO1SINH3HI ALY NZJ AVI38 J1LINDYN N3005 1 34112310445 80123N80 OO 41815 TYNINUAL t 3402 3118833 831113 3510N 28 217 div WIV HOISINHSHI 90 AVI3U 9LL3NDVM ub i 313 GATA AYM 3 1083105 SLA 92 N13 HOISINH3HI llu 26 218 801241402 2LL3NVW LINA 8001110 3HL OL AINO 31144 S MYHDVIC DNIWIM SIHL I 3414 11011 3ATVA 1083105 59 40 40151534 P EU ded 13399 8O1INON 3010835 48 10 dVH m JIN 5310N 39814 SVD 3A1VA 1083105 SSK dY 805835 1N3HM UOLSIS3H 1H911 NOLI23130 NOTLINNITYN S 39804 SV 3413338 11043105 STA dtY HOSN3S 2 90151538 911 1531 di GINE SV 3ATVA 1083105 SEAT 90 ONILINIT 2 90151538 H dV 20NV80 801 INON 3321AB3S dW 10114 d8 dH 110 100 3ATVA 1043105 109412 123130 199 35YHd dulo 919 YOI 1052735 ne nid SV9 108 3ATVA 01003105 SIA d V A1ddflS U3M d ONTHOLINS Sd 97 V9 11005735 13 TAWA NOISNVdX3 2INOUIJ313 34 31 80109 H3IY3H 35YOXNVE JHE OHl3 910
112. 2 Installation Manual 5139 303 Refrigerant Piping 6 3 Example of Connection Example of connection Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system If the system capacity is RXYQ18 or more re read to the first outdoor branch as seen from the indoor unit One outdoor unit installed Branch with refnet joint REFNET joint A G Outdoor unit Branch with refnet joint and refnet header Outdoor unit REFNET joint A H1 Branch with refnet header Outdoor unit Refnet header RXYQ5 16 8 4 ndoor units 1 8 Indoor units 1 8 8 Outdoor unit 24 Outdoor unit REFNET joint A G B Refnet header When multiple First outdoor outdoor units an installed E E EQ SED SE ES SES H1 ht i j i kl 1 1 mi 2 RXYQ18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 juo n a h ndoor units 1 8 4 Indoor units 1 8
113. 21 Coat the flange sheet surface with refrigeration oil 27 B Coat the inner and outer surface of the flare with Branch with refnet 4 112 refrigerator 24 Branch with refnet joint and refnet header 111 connect the shutoff valve and the piping 172 waterline erus 23 Connecting the Refrigerant Piping 168 Contents of Control Modes How to Select Operation Mode 78 Calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged 117 Contract Drawing gs asum e acra VE MES erani dari cR 11 Calculating Operating Noise 107 Control circuit diagram 13 Calibration method a 33 Cool Heat Mode Switching a 88 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks 102 Cool Heat Switching Remote Controller 89 Ceiling Mounted Built in Type FXSQ M Cooling Heating and Fan Only Operation 207 iine eias 47 Correlation of nozzle tip and size of refrigeration Drain Piping todo iiie oki id 47 22 DRAIN RAISING 47 Covering of Refrigerant Pipes drainage HOW 48 Particular
114. 22 shoe 38 360 300 Dg 25 106222 0019191 L 100 E NI V3042 KHRP26M72T e Gas Side Insulation Liquid Side TEN 332 290 42 Insulation eee 3 i 10096 10912 7 S D IAN ze 1 28 6 1 6275 1 1 2 TM ee D 0 0425 4 082227 0 08191 1 06159 004121 10912 TLD x r T 100 150 3043 KHRP26M73T Side 559544424442 u 1 0428 6 Liquid Side mae H a 10415 9 104159 X ETE i T 6181 z J D912 1 HERE x EF E em DONE C Lisi xi E 106191 m 534 E 100 L Le 634 400 138 109286 10438 1 0 0431 8 10801 0615 9 00495 10464 106222 00819 1 10 IL 120 B 50 1 KHRP26M73TP Reducing Socket 0 04318 04413 0 04381 2208413 pasta x2 LL Tes 120 120 I 120 ands 126 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 8 2 REFNET Header
115. 35 c Room36 C Thermometer 9 13 C when Room37 C Room38 C Room39 C Room40 C cooling Room 1 C Room 2 C Room 3 C Room 4 C 15 20 C when Room 5 C Room 6 C Room 7 C Room 8 C heating Room 9 Room10 Room11 Roomt2 Room13 Room14 15 Room16 C Discharge air Room17 C Room18 C Room19 C Room20 C temperature Room21 Room22 C Room23 C Room24 C Room25 C Room26 C Room27 C Room28 C Room29 C Room30 C Room31 C Room32 C Room33 Room34 Room35 Room36 C 2 Room37 C Room38 C Room39 C Room40 8 Room 1 G NG Room 2 G Room 3 NG Room 4 NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG Room 10 G NG Room11 G NG Room 12 G NG Room 13 G NG Room 14 G NG Room 15 G NG Room 16 G NG i i Room 17 G NG Room 18 G NG Room 19 G NG Room20 G NG F 1 Forward rotation Room 21 G NG Room 22 G NG Room 23 G NG Room 24 G NG Room 25 G NG Room 26 G NG Room 27 G NG Room 28 G NG Room 29 G NG Room 30 G NG Room 31 G NG Room 32 G NG Room 33 G NG Room 34 G 35 G NG Room36 G NG Room 37 NG Room 38 G NG Room39 G NG Room 40 G NG Room 1 G NG Room 2 G Room 3 G NG Room 4 NG Room 5 G NG Room 6 G NG Room 7 G NG Room 8 G NG Room 9 G NG 10 G NG Room 11 G NG Room 12 G Room 13 G NG Room
116. 4M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M Outdoor unit 3 Total number of connectable indoor units 20 20 22 32 32 32 Total capacity of connectable indoor units KW 25 2 65 5 28 0 72 8 30 8 80 0 34 0 88 4 36 5 94 9 39 3 102 1 HP 30HP 32HP 34HP 36HP 38HP 40HP System name RXYQ30M RXYQ32M RXYQ34M RXYQ36M RXYQ38M RXYQ40M Outdoor unit 1 RXYQ14M RXYQ16M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M Outdoor unit 2 RXYQ16M RXYQ16M RXYQ10M RXYQ10M RXYQ12M RXYQ14M Outdoor unit 3 RXYQ14M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M Total number of connectable indoor units 32 32 34 36 38 40 Total capacity of connectable indoor units kW 42 5 110 5 45 0 117 0 48 0 124 8 50 5 131 3 53 3 138 5 56 5 146 9 HP 42HP 44HP 46HP 48HP System name RXYQ42M RXYQ44M RXYQ46M RXYQ48M Outdoor unit 1 RXYQ10M RXYQ12M RXYQ14M RXYQ16M Outdoor unit 2 RXYQ16M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M Outdoor unit 3 RXYQ16M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M RXYQ16M Total number of connectable indoor units 40 40 40 40 Total capacity of connectable indoor units kW 59 0 153 4 61 8 160 6 65 0 169 0 67 5 175 5 General Information Si39 303 Product Outline Connectable indoor unit Type Model Name Power Supply Ceiling mounted cassette type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 125 Double flow Ceiling mounted cassette type un D EE gt Multi flow FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 600x600 Ceili
117. Compute again the refrigerant amount to be added based on the piping length and charge proper amount of refrigerant additionally General Information 63 Test Operation Si39 303 4 1 4 Confirmation on normal operation e Conduct normal unit operation after the check operation has been completed When outdoor air temperature is 24 C or higher the unit can not be operated with heating mode See the instruction manual attached Confirm that the indoor outdoor units can be operated normally When an abnormal noise due to liquid compression by the compressor can be heard stop the unit immediately and turn on the crankcase heater to heat up it sufficiently then start operation again e Operate indoor unit one by one to check that the corresponding outdoor unit operates e Confirm that the indoor unit discharges cold air or warm air e Operate the air direction control button and flow rate control button to check the function of the devices 64 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 2 Operation When Power is Turned On 4 2 1 When Turning On Power First Time The unit cannot be run for up to 12 minutes to automatically set the master power and address indoor outdoor address etc Status Outdoor unit Test lamp H2P Blinks Can also be set during operation described above Indoor unit If ON button is pushed during operation described above the UH malfunction indicator
118. D PIPE 3 Refer to Table 6 above REDUSER 1 Refer to Table 6 above GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 1 2 attaching outdoor unit Outdoor unit B According to Table4 cut the joint with a pipe cutter GAS SIDE JOINT According to Table4 cut the joint with a pipe cutter 122 General Information Si39 303 Appendix e BHFP22M135 e Connect gas side pipe with gas side joint Refer to Fig 11 According the INATALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit brazing the refrigerant piping GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 1 2 Attaching outdoor unit GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 According to Table6 cut the joint and reduser 1 Ir with a pipe catter REDUSER 1 According to Table7 cut the joint S gt with a pipe catter DeC GAS SIDE JOINT 1 Outdoor unit A l 1 u 2 1 According to TableB cut the joint Tr with a pipe catter lt GAS SIDE PIPE Field supply x GAS SIDE JOINT 2 TSS According to Table9 cut the joint Fig 11 with a pipe catter JIOINT Field supply GAS SIDE PIPE Field supply ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES Refer to 122 for Table 6 and 120 for Table 7 8 and 9 Installation of e BHFP22M90 liquid side pipes Connect liquid side pipe with liquid side joint Refer to Fig 5 and oil pipe According the INATALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit brazing the refrigerant piping Outdoor unit A According to Tableb cut the joint LIQUID SID
119. DAIKIN Design Installation amp Testing Instruction 5139 303 l R410A Heat Pump 50Hz So s RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B RXYQ14MY1B RXYQ16MY1B RXYQ18MY1B RXYQ20MY1B RXYQ22MY1B RXYQ24MY1B RXYQ26MY1B RXYQ28MY1B RXYQ30MY1B RXYQ32MY1B RXYQ34MY1B RXYQ36MY1B RXYQ38MY1B RXYQ40MY1B RXYQ42MY1B RXYQ44MY1B RXYQ46MY1B RXYQ48MY1B Preface This system is a modular zone controllable air conditioning system of great sophistication which is capable of assembly in a variety of different configurations It would however be no exaggeration to say that the full potential of the systemOs functions can only be achieved in combination with the skills of those involved in the design of the equipment itself and those responsible for the installation work As the move towards intelligent buildings has gathered momentum so we have also been seeing ever more a growing demand for a wider range of independently controllable building related functions Against this background there have also quite naturally been calls for the development of more distributed types of air conditioning systems while at the same time taking full account of the need to use energy economically by demand matching in view of the huge annual increases in the demand for electric power seen in recent years We have therefore prepared this installation manual to enable installation work to be handled confidently on the basis of a c
120. E PIPE Field supply with a pipe catter According to Table4 cut the joint with pipe catter LIQUID SIDE JOINT OIL PIPE Field supply Refer to P 120 for Table 4 and 5 General Information 123 Si39 303 Appendix e BHFP22M135 Connect liquid side pipe with liquid side joint Refer to Fig 12 According the INATALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit brazing the refrigerant piping Outdoor unit A 011 PIPE Field supply LIQUID SIDE PIPE Field supply According to Table9 cut the joint with a pipe catter Outdoor unit B According to Table cut the joint with a pipe catter Outdoor unit C LIQUID SIDE JOINT 1 According to Table8 cut the joint with a pipe catter W According to Tabled cut the joint with a pipe catter Refer P 120 for Table 7 8 and 9 After connection piping m Connection piping between the outdoor unit and indoor unit According to the INSTALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit m Insulation of joint Seal the insulation and field piping insulation joint with the tape ZZA part m Fig 6 General Information 124 Si39 303 Appendix 7 7 2 n case of Underside Piping Illustration N Caution sure to secure space for brazing and piping work under the outdoor unit e BHFP22M90 W Cutting the joint and reducer According to table 4 and 5 cut the joint and reducer for use m Connection piping Connect pipes with joint Refer to fig 7 Out
121. GNIS 1 a 3513 HL MS N L 2 LINN 1 LINN 3 11 NOISSINSNV S3U M SLINA YOOdLNO es N l l Alddfls H3M0d Sllun 941 1898194 salJas U pa109UU02 s 921105 J MOd 941 19 1 Un 34 199 1904 9119 u paj129UUOO S 921105 19 04 IY 996 ZLINM ueui 1864e 94 1snu LLIN 0 1122402 5921105 JAMOd 9 41111 991 6uizi 2n JUdUd nbd JO 51915002 95 5 5191 9502294 19 246910 u 592005 19 04 991 j AdNuJaju URI 1041 YOIMS 991 10480 jueudinba 4229 10 J MOd 94 01 ASN 941 pu 422 5 Y 10150 0 9415 ag 001391191501 21212945 V 40 s I 38p 0 J0 JO p pu9lu JOU oJ pue AJ UO sapinb 101129 102 210 511104 eJouab ue UMOUS DUIJIM S9p02 0 1 pue 220 2 4021 440 941 YIIM due 4 02 u popunoJlb aq 1995 lun 3514 HILIMS N EYN Tivo S3UIM 7 SLINA 80001010 AL JONpPlA pul 3 un J00pino 01 pajddns s 924105 JaMOd 94 UdYM 101211229 9 pasuad 01 Aq papiaoud isnu siuauoduoo pue Pals IY 118195 10J 493094q 1172112 112180 6 Weibeip bulJ M 995 51101 10 SY 8 819 sJ012npu02 194402 950 9p02 000 100 pu 20 91902 442 L 34 YIM A dwod 19nU 9115 34 UO 9 paund0Jd 0 5 211219 pue siuauoduoo 3Sn HOLIMS N N 14111 AlddfS H3M0d 4 Y Buldim iv 1 810N HOLIMS General Information 142 Appendix
122. General Information 140 Appendix c E S LL CN e e T o N RXYQ5 16MY1B 9 07006 SLINM 800081 3411 83404 3811 83404 3811 83404 318V S3HIM 0 318 2 S3HIN 318V9 541 3513 3513 3513 3NI1 H3M0d 3513 318V S3UIM 2 HOLIMS HOLIMS HOLIMS HOLIMS N 1 N n N 1 N 3N17_NOISSINSNVHL 3N11 NOISSINSNVHI NOISSINSNVUL 318V S3UIM Z 318 2 S3UIM 318 2 S3UIM INTI NOISSINSNVUIL 318V S3U M 0 3504 HOLIMS N ego SLINA 8000100 101211129 9 posua2 AQ p p A04d 90 3snu S UaUOdWOD pue p 9 j G 921105 JOMOd ojd 3 nu 34 3uoud nbo 944 10 51515002 wWatsks 5141 9572294 119195 10 1972940 1112112 1191501 Y paieJbaiU UP U 592105 Je 49144930 UVI 304 121188 34 1191801 6 WRUBRIP HUIJIM 995 e 1019p 10 sv E quaud nba 9209 JO 19604 941 01 ISN Y pue 121185 Y 110150 01 duns ag 8 140 SJO INPUDD 194402 asp 2 500146110380 21212945 V J04 11039 Je apnjou 01 88p02 01191 pu 290 914021 440 10 10 Papudazu JOU pue 1110 sopinb uo 329Uu02 10 s3U 0d 9J9u96 ade umous BULJIM L 943 YTIM K dUOD snw 9115 34
123. HEADER Combination of outdoor units follow Engineering Data General Information 119 Appendix Si39 303 m Field supply parts Table 2 Quantity Selection procedure Insulation FOR BHFP22M90 For Pipe Refer to Table4 5 FOR BHFP22M135 Refrigerant Refer to 1 7 8 9 Pipes Jioint Joint siize must be the same angle of upper side Outdoor unit 9 Refer to Table 8 For gas pipe as gas Side pipe size of the go degrees NO of outdoor Total capacity index units of outdoor units X lt 550 2units N Caution Outdoor units multi connection piping connect right according to the INSTALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit W Pipe size selection and cutting position of JOINT According to the following table cut the joint or reducer with a pipe cutter for use e BHFP22M90 Between the outdoor unit and the refrigerant branch kit Outdoor unit A Outdoor unit Between the outdoor unit and the connection piping kit Table 5 Capacity index of outdoor units GAS LIQUID Select the proper pipe size based on the total capacity index of outdoor units Table 4 Total capacity index Pipe size Unit mm of outdoor units LIQUID 450 lt X lt 550 928 6 415 9 122 2 300 350 Dit 9 650 lt X lt 800 TUR 419 1 e BHFP22M135 UPPER aue Outdoor wit A Outdoor uit uit Between th i ion piping titTqble 9 Capacity index of outdoor units Between the outdoor unit
124. Heat cannot be Changed 215 8 3 Fan Operation is Possible but Cooling and Heating do not Work 215 8 4 The Fan Strength does not Correspond to the Setting 215 Table of Contents Si39 303 8 5 The Fan Direction does not Correspond to the Setting 215 8 6 White Mist comes out of a Unit 216 8 7 Noise of Air 4 44 216 8 8 Dust comes out of the Unit P fe nde needs 216 8 9 The Units can Give off 2 0444 216 8 10 The Outdoor Unit Fan does not 216 8 11 The Display SHOWS 88 tier ni Ua ton aes eee 217 8 12 The Compressor in the Outdoor Unit does not Stop after a Short Heating 217 8 13 The Inside of an Outdoor Unit is Warm even when the Unit has stopped 217 9 xr Fire Ea 218 Part 4 Precautions for New Refrigerant R4104A 221 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 222 DAMES L 222 1 2 Refrigerant Cylinders e e te E
125. Introduction Confirm the sizes of the shutoff valves connected to the system referring to the table on the below Q5 type Q8 type Q10 type Q12 type Q14 type Q16 type Liquid line shutoff valve 9 9 5 12 7 15 9 22 2 25 4 Gas line The model Q8 The model Q12 14 16 supports supports onsite onsite piping of 628 6 by the shutoff valve piping of 019 1 by the accessory pipes accessory pipes Installation Manual 175 Si39 303 AN Caution Opening shutoff valve 1 Remove the cap and turn the valve counterclockwise with the hexagon wrench JISB4648 2 Turn it until the shaft stops Do not apply excessive force to the shutoff valve Doing so may break the valve body as the valve is not a backseat type Always use the special tool 3 Make sure to tighten the cap securely Closing shutoff valve 1 Remove the cap and turn the valve clockwise with the hexagon wrench JISB4648 2 Securely tighten the valve until the shaft contacts the main body seal 3 Make sure to tighten the cap securely For the tightening torque refer to the table on the bellow Tightening torque Tightening torque N m Turn clockwise to close Shutoff Gas line valve size Shaft valve body Cap valve lid Service port Flare nut hea i unit 1 6 4 14 17 96 54 66 Hexagonal 13 5 16 5 m 9 5 wrench 33 39 0127 8 1 9 9 mm 18 22 50 60 _ Hexagonal _
126. LINN 8000110 IHL OL AINO Gal Idd SI MYHOV G ONTHIA SIHI I AIVA ANM Y 01042105 405435 2 40151534 01 052 35 21H 59108 5 343330 01043105 405835 INJYYNI 9015 71052 35 LA LA SY9 10H 01003105 T IN3HH09 M FATWA NOISNVdX3 21 0 12313 1109909 193130 TYSU3A3U 1081009 5 S H3MDd ONIH 80112 4 414405 H3W0d 91815 TVNINH3I 13538 1531 NU L38 135 300 92 310d0W 04 10553448027 HOLUM HOLIMS NO1108 HS 90 31000W HIAOd OUT 39100 QuVOS 1119819 CAIN l dN 5321430 1335 duvOg 2 2 AOZ AOTZ DZZ H3WHOJSNVHI SEA Av13u 2r13NOvH ULLAS 08 1103819 31NI HOLIAS 384055344 SpA Qrl3NOvH H6 NIVN CHVOE _LINOUID 31154 ong e1 aas SEE X09 HOLIMS CX2V8 AB055390 TVNOLLd0 u01 3135 1038 1009 234 13 23 14 400p1n0 INSNOdMOD 103 10102 1013380 SI GP 110981 CALAIYA 40100 HO1238802 51 039 WIX Tae ie ZHOG NE 417 086 1941 NAAN General Information 138 Appendix RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B Si39 303
127. Notes When setting the timer off and on at the same time repeat the above procedure from K to once again m After the timer is programmed the display shows the remaining time m Press the timer on off button once again to cancel programming The display vanishes For example When the timer is programmed to stop the system after 3 hours and start the system after 4 hours the system will stop after 3 hours and start 1 hour later RXYQ series REYQ series p AIR CONDITIONER eo Operation Manual 211 Operation Procedure Si39 303 6 5 Setting the Master Remote Controller m When the system is installed it is necessary to designate one of the remote controllers as the master remote controller For RXYQ series When one outdoor unit is connected with several indoor units For REYQ series m Only the master remote controller can select heating and cooling or automatic only REYQ series operation m The displays of slave remote controllers show tj amp changeover under control and they automatically follow the operation mode directed by the master remote controller However it is possible to changeover to program dry with slave remote controllers if the syste
128. PC board in the outdoor unit After installing the interconnecting wires inside the unit wrap them along with the onsite refrigerant pipes using finishing tape as shown below 1 Liquid pipe 2 Gas pipe 3 Interconnecting wiring 4 Insulator 5 Finishing tape For the above wiring always use vinyl cords with 0 75 to 1 25 mm sheath or cables 2 core wires 3 core wire cables are allowable for the cooler heater changeover remote controller only Installation Manual 189 Field Wiring Si39 303 N Caution In case of RXYQ18 48MY1B W The interconnecting wiring between the outdoor units in the same pipe line must be connected to the Q1 Q2 Out Multi terminals Connecting the wires to the Out Out terminals results in system malfunction m The wiring for the other lines must be connected to the F1 F2 Out Out terminals of the P board in the outdoor unit to which the interconnecting wiring for the indoor units is connected W The base unit is the outdoor unit to which the interconnecting wiring for the indoor units is connected m The interconnecting wiring between the outdoor units must be 30 m in length at maximum Electric box A1P Use the accessory clamps 1 to retain them to the electric box Be sure to keep the power line and transmission line apart from each other Be careful about polarity of the transmission line Make sure that the transmission line is cl
129. Pressure regulator Nitrogen cylinder V0967 Important points 1 The gas used must be nitrogen oxygen carbon dioxide and flon should not be used 2 A pressure regulator must be used 18 General Information Si39 303 Installation Covering of Covering is an extremely important operation as it prevents water dirt or dust from getting inside Refrigerant Pipes the pipes Moisture inside the pipes was a constant source of trouble in the past The utmost care is required to nip this problem in the bud The end of each pieces of pipe must be covered Pinching is the most effective method but taping is an simple alternative which may be used according to the work area and term of work Location Term of Work Covering Method Outdoors 1 months or more Pinching Less than 1 months Pinching or taping Indoors Irrelevant Pinching or taping 1 Pinching method The end of the copper pipe is squeezed together and the gap brazed 2 Taping method The end of the copper pipe is covered with PVC tape vinyl tape Copper pipe Brazing area V0968 Taping method Open end Squeeze flat Bring tape back to starting point gt gt gt Tape round pipe again Copper pipe V0969 Particular care should be taken during the following operations W When passing copper pipe through a penetration hole Dirt easily gets into the pipe W When copper pipe is located outside Rainwater get
130. Push the SET button BS2 and set LED display example Setting displaying item LED display to a setting item you 9 displaying H5P H7P want Display for malfunction 1 preparing test 2 CH selector individual e e 3 C H selector Master e 4 C H selector Slave Regarding setting item 1 5 6 only the present status is 5 Low noise operation e e displayed For the respective 6 Demand operation description refer to the table shown on lower right Setting No 1 5 6 are the present status display only The cool heat selection setting can be changed on setting item 2 3 4 Display for malfunction preparing test run After setting push the RETURN button BS3 and decide the Normal e nem Malfunction e 1 e e Preparing Test run 9 Display during low noise operation Normal When the RETURN button BS3 is pushed the status becomes the initial During low noise operation O e status of Setting mode 1 H3P to H5P LED display changes depending on setting No 2 3 4 V2763 Display during demand operation Norm
131. Q30MYIB 2 RXYQS4MY1B 6 RXYGSSMYIB RXYQ40MY1B Nominal cooling capacity kW 84 5 89 0 96 0 101 0 106 0 113 0 Nominal heating capacity kW 95 0 100 0 108 0 113 0 119 0 127 0 Nominal input cooling heating kW 29 9 26 9 31 2 28 1 32 3 31 5 33 6 32 6 35 2 34 1 38 9 36 2 1600x930x765 1600x930x765 1600 gt 930x765 1600 gt 930x765 Dimensions HxWxD mm 1600x1240x765 1600x1240x765 1600x930x765 1600x930x765 1600x1240x765 16001240 765 16001240765 1600 1240 765 1600124076 16001240765 1600 1240 765 Weight kg 3231325 3251325 230 230 323 23042804325 230 281 325 2301323 325 S 13 8 13 8 13 8 15 8 15 8 15 8 gerant gas pipe hm 934 9 349 349 413 941 3 9413 A Refrigerant liquid inch 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 Connections pipe mm 9 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 1 6 19 1 9 19 1 O Sa inch 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 quang pip mm 64 64 64 64 64 64 Compressor RXYQ30MY1B RXYQ32MY1B RXYGSAMYiB RXYQ36MYiB RXYQ38MY1B RXYQ40MY1B Oil type Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 Oil charge volume 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 27616 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
132. RXYQ10 type 022 2 i RXYQ12 14 16 type 028 6 012 7 Oil equalizing line Only for RXYQ18 or more D Piping size outer diameter 96 4 Unit mm 116 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 6 How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged Additional refrigerant to be charged R Kg R should be rounded off in units of 0 1Kg nm Note If a negative result is gotten for R from the formula at right no refrigerant needs to be added Total length Total length m Total length m Total length m R of liquid piping x0 35 of liquid piping x0 25 of liquid piping 0 17 of liquid piping x0 11 size at 022 2 J sizeato19 1 J size at 215 9 size at 212 7 Total length m Total length m Model name Amount of refrigerant of liquid piping 0 054 of liquid piping x0 022 RXYQS5 16MY1B 0 kg size at 9 5 size at 6 4 J RXYQ18 32MY1B 3 kg RXYQ34 48MY1B 6kg Example for refrigerant branch using refnet joint and refnet header for RXYQ34MY1B Outdoor unit REFNET joint Se gpu esse i H1 bi E Refnet header gt 8 J J
133. RXYQ18MY1B RXYQ20MY1B RXYQ22MY1B RXYQ24MY1B RXYQ26MY1B RXYQ28MY1B Nominal cooling capacity kw 50 4 56 0 61 5 68 0 72 5 78 0 Nominal heating capacity kW 56 5 63 0 69 0 76 5 81 5 87 5 Nominal input cooling heating kW 16 0 16 2 18 0 18 6 19 6 20 1 23 3 22 2 24 6 23 3 26 2 24 8 Dimensions pmo om qp z gpx ps CRORES Weight kg 230 230 230 230 230 281 230 323 230 325 281 325 Refrigerant gas pipe inch 11 8 11 8 11 8 13 8 13 8 13 8 mm 928 6 9 28 6 9 28 6 34 9 9 34 9 9 34 9 Refrigerant liquid inch 5 8 5 8 5 8 5 8 6 8 6 8 Connections pipe a mm 159 159 159 159 9191 9191 equalizing pipe inch 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 mm 64 64 64 64 64 64 Compressor RXYGQ18MY1B RXYQ20MY1B RXYQ22MY1B RXYQ24MY1B RXYQ26MY1B RXYQ28MY1B Oil type Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Oil charge volume 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 MEERA host eer Puy Crankcase heater W 33 33 4 33 33 33 33 33 33 39 33 4 93439 25239 135533 secs m Refrigerant type R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A Refrigerant charge kg 8 6 9 6 9 6 9 6 9 6 11 4 9 6 12 9 9 6 14 4 11 4 14 4 Nominal air flow m min 1754180 1804 180 1804210 1804210 1804210 2104210 Fan motor output w 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 General RXY
134. Rated power consumption NU uu UE ete ee een cerita 80 of rated power consumption 70 of rated power consumption 60 of rated power consumption level 1 instruct Power consumption set by Demand 1 level setting 40 of rated power consumption Forced thermostat OFF Fan operation Image of operation in the case of B Power consumption 4 Rated power consumption 80 of rated power consumption 70 of rated power consumption _ 60 of rated power consumption 40 of rated power consumption Forced thermostat OFF Fan operation The power consumption during the demand level 1 instructing can be set with the Demand 1 level setting 70 of rated power consumption has been set at factory V3081 When the Continuous demand setting is set to ON OFF has been set at factory the power consumption can be set with the Demand 1 level setting 70 of rated power consumption has been set at factory Image of operation in the case of A and B Power consumption 4 Rated power consumption 80 of rated power consumption 70 of rated power consumption 60 of rated power consumption The power consumption set with Demand 1 level setting Demand level 2 instructing 40 of rated power consumption Forced thermostat OFF Fan operation higher demand V3082 The power consumption can be set with the D
135. SS 3 4 5 tej 7 Indoor units 1 8 8 f the system capacity is RXYQ18 or more re read to the first outdoor branch as seen from the indoor unit Between outdoor and indoor units Actual pipe length Pipe length between outdoor and indoor units 150m Example unit 6 a i lt 150m Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outdoor and indoor units lt 175m assume equivalent pipe length of refnet joint to be 0 5m that of refnet header to be 1m calculation purposes Total extension length Total piping length from outdoor unit to all indoor units lt 300m Between outdoor branch and indoor unit Only for RXYQ18 or more Actual pipe length Outdoor unit 24 Piping length from outdoor branch to outdoor unit lt 10m Approximately length max 13m t 10m TES Between outdoor and indoor units E L Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units H1 x 50m Max 40m if the outdoor unit is below Between indoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between adjacent indoor units H2 lt 15m Between outdoor and outdoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor unit main and outdoor unit sub H3 lt 5m Actual pipe length Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit either refnet joint or refnet header to indoor unit 40m Example unit 8
136. Second Code No Setting 13 23 4 01 Upward Draft prevention 02 Standard 03 Downward Ceiling soiling prevention Air Flow Rate When the optional parts high performance filter etc is installed sets to change fan speed for Switching at securing air flow rate Discharge Grille for Field Air Flow Rate Switching Follow the instruction manual for the optional parts to enter the setting numbers 74 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 1 7 Centralized Control Group No Setting BRC1A Type m f carrying out centralized control by central remote controller or unified ON OFF controller group No must be set for each group individually by remote controller m Group No setting by remote controller for centralized control 1 When in the normal mode push the button for 4 seconds or more and operation then enters the field setting mode 2 Set mode No 00 with the button 3 Push the button to inspect the group No display 4 Setthe group No for each group with the button The group No increases in the manner of 1 00 1 01 1 15 2 00 4 15 However the unified ON OFF controller displays only the group No within the range selected by the switch for setting each address 5 Push the timer button to define the selected group No 6 Push the button to return to the normal mode Field Set Mode KE VLO44 W Even if not
137. Setting item Description No Setting 281 1 oree a A select hy remote controler DS1 2 ON Not used Do not change the factory settings DS1 4 OFF Factory set DS2 1 YN Not used Do not change the factory settings 4 OFF Factory set DS3 1 Not used Do not change the factory settings 2 OFF Factory set Setting by pushbutton switches The following settings are made by pushbutton switches on PC board In case of multi outdoor unit system various items should be set with the master unit Setting with the slave unit is disabled The master unit and slave unit can be discriminated with the LED indication as shown below H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P H8P Master unit e e O e Slave unit 1 Slave unit 2 Factory setting General Information 79 Test Operation Si39 303 BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 BS5 MODE SET RETURN TEST RESET V2760 There are the following three setting modes Setting mode 1 H1P off Initial status when normal Used to select the cool heat setting Also indicates during abnormal low noise control and demand control Setting mode 2 H1P on Used to modify the operating status and to set program addresses etc Usually used in servicing the system Monitor mode H1P blinks Used to check the program
138. Single component HFC134a 1 1 9 3 2 MPa gauge pressure 3 80 MPa gauge pressure 2 75MPa gauge pressure Design pressure 32 6 kgf cm 38 7 kgf cm 28 0 kgf cm Refrigerant oil Synthetic oil Ether Mineral oil Suniso Ozone destruction factor ODP 0 0 288 Combustibility None None None Toxicity None None None 1 Non azeotropic mixture refrigerant mixture of two or more refrigerants having different boiling points 2 Quasi azeotropic mixture refrigerant mixture of two or more refrigerants having similar boiling points 3 The design pressure is different at each product Please refer to the installation manual for each product Reference 1 10 19716 kgf cm HFC 32 125 50 50 wt 20 0 y 5 I SALT d 1 f gt S D 18 2 2 7 2 NOS 10 0 Set SE ASTER a VACA RE 120 JE a 0 5 0 TH AA eS T 9 02 m KS 0 05 m s Sa er P MPa 0 2 aka Z E IS E y usa qp uk t Eres 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 h Pressure Enthalpy curves of HFC 32 125 50 50wt 222 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A m Thermodynamic characteristic of R410A DAIREP ver2 0 Steam pressure Density Specific heat at constant Specific enthalpy Specific entropy kg m pressure kJ kgK kJ kg KJ KgK Liquid Vapor Liqui
139. T LPIPE SIZE 6 22 2 PIPE SIZE 619 1 X0 25 y PIPE SIZE 159 X0 1T kg u X035 X0 25 yy X0 17 TOTAL LENGTH OF LIQUID TOTAL LENGTH OF LIQUID TOTAL LENGTH OF LIQUID OUTDOOR UNIT PIPE SIZE 171 X0 11 PIPE SIZE 995 XQ 054 4 PIPE SIZE 061 X0 022 ait THE AMOUNT x01 m X0 054 050 022 MODEL NAME REFRIGERRANTS RXYQ5 16 0 Kg RXYQ18 32 3 Kg 2 RECORD OF INDOOR UNIT MODEL NAME AND INSTALLATION SITE 6 Kg No 1 2 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MODEL NAME INSTALLATION SITE NO 11 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WODEL NAME INSTALLATION SITE NO 21 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 MODEL NAME INSTALLATION SITE NO 31 32 33 34 35 36 3T 38 39 40 MODEL NAME INSTALLATION SITE DA T 3 RECORD OF INSTALLATION DATE TR 4 AFTER EQUIPPING PLEASE PUT IT ON THE BACK SIDE OF AN EX BOARD x al 3P114237A 118 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 7 Outdoor Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit m This kit includes the following parts e BHFP22M90 Gas side 1 pcs Liquid side 1 pcs Socket 1 pcs 1 0838 1 00431 8 e BHFP22M135 Gas side 1 pcs Liquid side 1 pcs Reducing socket 1 pcs T joint for oil pressure equalizing pipe 1 pcs th mn Note Installation of outdoor units refer to INSTALLATION MANUAL of outdoor unit Installation of refrigerant pipes between outdoor and indoor units need to arrange for REFNET JOINT and REFNET
140. YQ18 32MY1B eee 142 P 4 48 1 143 Picking power line and transmission line 188 RXYQ5 16MY1B 141 Pipe 2 177 Flare Gauge aee ete aite 24 Pipe SIZO a 115 Flaring 25 Piping Installation 108 Elaring TOON iere ete ye ed 226 Piping System Diagrams Floor Standing Concealed Floor Standing Type Indoor Unito tente 137 FXLQ M FXNQ M 52 RXYOQTOMY TBs aene 135 Front Piping 12 135 BHEP22M135 e eed 121 RXYQTAMYTB eiie 136 BHEP22M90 x oett e p 121 16 00 k qusa 136 RXYQ5MYTB nite ic ene 134 G FEXYOSMYTB oU un 135 Gauge manifold for R410A 228 Positioning of indoor unit 8 Positioning of outdoor 8 H Pressure down despite absence of leaks during air Hand Over to Customer 147 Important Points 105 Procedure for Checking Dangerous Make the service contact address clear 105 Concentration
141. YQ36MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 90A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ38MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 90A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ40MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 100A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ42MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 100A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ44MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 100A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ46MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 110A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ48MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 110A 0 75 1 25mm When using residual current operated circuit breakers be sure to use a high speed type 200mA rated residual operating current nm Notes m Select the power supply cable in accordance with relevant local and national regulations W Wire size must comply with the applicable local and national code Specifications for local wiring power cord and branch wiring are in compliance with IEC60245 m WIRE TYPE HO5VV Only in protected pipes use HO7RN F when protected pipes are not used Installation Manual 181 Field Wiring Si39 303 7 3 General Up to 3 units can be connected by crossover power source wiring between outdoor units However units of smaller capacity must be connected downstream For details refer to the equipment design data and technical data Make sure to connect the power source wire to the power source terminal block and to clamp it as shown in figure 14 chapter Field line connection As this unit is equipped with an inverter installing a phase advancing capacitor not only will deteriorate power factor improvement effect but also may cause capacitor abnormal heating accident du
142. a 67 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks 102 5 1 Caution for Refrigerant 1 102 Hand Over to COSIOMED rer gamed eerie eee eee 105 6 1 Operational Steps x cad rst oO Oca edu 105 gt FADD SMO CRT Tr 106 7 1 Operating Noise of Indoor Units 106 7 2 Piping Installation POM 108 7 3 Allowable Pipirig Eenglli iiie d Helene 110 7 4 Refrigerant branch kit selection 113 7 5 Pipe size Selectiort score cope outer gute Dp rage yas 115 7 6 How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged 117 7 7 Outdoor Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit 119 7 8 REFNET Pipe Connections for VRV II R410A Series 126 7 9 VRV Inspection Sheet ate leniter tested 129 7 10 Piping System Diagrams ies 134 7 11 Winnog Di grass i u L pro ien a e ro npud anaes 138 7 12 Bad Examples and Good Examples Installation 144 General Infomation 1 Product Outline Si39 303 1 Product Outline 1 1 Model Names of Indoor Outdoor Units Indoor Units Type Model Name Power Supply Ceiling mounted cassette type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 125
143. after the unit stops but wait for at least 5 minutes For systems with cool heat changeover remote control switch RXYQ series REYQ series g c EN VDAIKIN WDAImiN E BRC1A51 Select cooling operation mode with the cool heat changeover remote control switch Press the on off button The operation lamp lights up and the system starts operation Press the operation mode selector button several times and select program 1 Lom Press the air flow direction adjust button only for EXC FXF FXH FXK FXA Refer to the chapter Adjusting the air flow direction for details Stopping the system Press the on off button once again The operation lamp goes off and the system stops operation m Do notturn off power immediately after the unit stops but wait for at least 5 minutes Operation Manual 209 Operation Procedure Si39 303 6 3 Adjusting the Air Flow Direction Only for Double flow Multi flow Corner Ceiling suspended and Wall mounted series REYQ series n n v a 1 2 5 BRC1A51
144. ainage 21 e Root edes 45 Duct Work Indoor Drain up piping 45 Operational steps 55 Electric wiring work aa 46 Taking Account of Noise and Vibration 55 Drawings amp Flow Charts iii Si39 303 E L Electrical Work laying power 185 a PCB for remote control multiple core cable Leak testne oie eee edito re ee Re 175 must not be used 53 l Gak tester us as tt p 228 Choosing a circuit breaker 53 Eh 54 M When cable more than 1 25 mm is used 52 Mismatch between cables connecting indoor and Example of Connection 173 outdoor units and corresponding piping 145 Excessive noise due to incorrect angling of Movement of the air flow flap 210 REFNET joints a e 148 N F Names and functions of parts 202 Field line connection u 183 LE 186 Field Setting From Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit 119 Mode changing procedure 80 Outdoor Unit PC Board Layout 66 Field Wiring RX
145. al O e During demand operation O e 4 H3P to H5P LED display changes depending on setting No 2 3 4 O ON e OFF Q Blinking General Information 81 Test Operation Si39 303 b Setting mode 2 Push and hold the MODE button BS1 for 5 seconds and set to Setting mode 2 lt Selection of setting items gt Push the SET button BS2 and set the LED display to a setting item shown in the table on the right 4 Push the RETURN button BS3 and decide the item The present setting condition is blinked lt Selection of setting conditions gt y Push the SET button BS2 and set to the setting condition you want Push the RETURN button BS3 and decide the condition Push the RETURN button BS3 and set to the initial status of Setting mode 2 f you become unsure of how to proceed push the MODE button BS1 and return to setting mode 1 V2764 No Setting item Description Operates by Standard compressor only when inverter compressor malfunctions Temporary operation until the 0 ea compressor is replaced Since the comfortability is extremely deteriorated immediately replace the compressor This setting is not applicable to RXYQ5M 1 unified Sets address for cool heat unified operation
146. al attention to the place such as a basement etc where refrigerant can stay since refrigerant is heavier than air Procedure for Checking Dangerous Concentration Check the Dangerous concentration in accordance with steps 1 4 below and take whatever action is necessary Calculate the amount of refrigerant kg charged to each system separately Amount of refrigerant Additional charging Total amount of in a single indoor amount refrigerant kg in unit system the system Amount of refrigerant with which the system is charged before leaving the factory Amount of refrigerant added locally in accordance with the length or diameter of the refrigerant piping m Notes Where a single refrigerant facility is divided onto 2 entirely independent refrigerant systems then use the amounts of refrigerant with which each separate system of charged 102 General Information Si39 303 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Step 2 Step 3 Calculate the smallest room volume m In a case like the following calculate the volume of a b as a single room or as the smallest room a Where there are no smaller room divisions O tdo or nit Indoor nit b Where there is a room division but there is an opening between the rooms sufficiently large to permit a free flow of air back and forth tdoor n
147. allation Service Space It is extremely important that enough space is left when installing the equipment to allow routine servicing and maintenance to be carried out without undue hindrance It is particularly important to bear in mind the work which will be required if the compressor needs to be replaced The layout of the pipework can sometimes cause considerable difficulties if the compressor needs to be changed Take care the space for compressor removal Foundation V1045 General Information 57 Installation Si39 303 3 2 13 Inspecting and Handling the Unit At delivery the package should be checked and any damage should be reported immediately to the carrier claims agent When handling the unit take into account the following 1 Fragile handle the unit with care 1t Keep the unit upright in order to avoid compressor damage Choose the path along which the unit is to be brought in ahead of time If a forklift it to be used pass the forklift arms through the large openings on the bottom of the unit Lift the unit preferably with a crane and 2 belts of at least 8m long When lifting the unit with a crane always use protectors to prevent belt damage and pay attention to the position of the unit s centre of gravity After installation remove the transport clasps attached to the large openings 7 Bring the unit as close to its final installation position in its original package to preven
148. amped as shown in the figure in chapter Field line connection Check that wiring lines do not make contact with refrigerant piping Firmly close the lid and arrange the electrical wires so as to prevent the lid or other parts from coming loose When you don t use a wire conduit be sure to protect the wires with vinyl tubes etc to prevent the edge of the knock out hole from cutting the wires 190 Installation Manual Si39 303 Before Operation 8 Before Operation 8 1 Checks Before Initial Start up N Caution Make sure that the circuit breaker on the power supply panel of the installation is switched off Attach the power wire securely Introducing power with a missing N phase or with a mistaken N phase will break the equipment After the installation check the following before switching on the circuit breaker 1 The position of the switches that require an initial setting Make sure that switches are set according to your application needs before turning the power supply on Power supply wiring and transmission wiring Use a designated power supply and transmission wiring and make sure that it has been carried out according to the instructions described in this manual according to the wiring diagrams and according to local and national regulations Pipe sizes and pipe insulation Make sure that correct pipe sizes are installed and that the insulation work is properly executed Additional refrigerant charge Th
149. and indoor units lt 175m assume equivalent pipe length of refnet joint to be 0 5m that of refnet header to be 1m calculation purposes Total extension length Total piping length from outdoor unit to all indoor units 300m Between outdoor branch and outdoor unit Only for RXYQ18 or more Actual pipe length Outdoor unit rx 10m Piping length from outdoor branch to outdoor unit lt 10m s lt 10m Approximately length max 13m t 10m Between outdoor and indoor units t Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor and indoor units H1 lt 50m Max 40m if the outdoor unit is below Between indoor and indoor units Difference in height Difference in height between adjacent indoor units H2 15m Between outdoor and outdoor units Difference in height Difference in height between outdoor unit main and outdoor unit sub H3 lt 5m Actual pipe length Pipe length from first refrigerant branch kit either refnet joint or refnet header to indoor unit lt 40m Example unit 8 b c d e f px 40m 110 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 3 2 Branch with refnet joint and refnet header Maximum allowable length Allowable height length Allowable Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system Branch with refnet joint and refnet header Outdoor unit REFNET joint B
150. and signal cables must not be laid inside the same conduit Power cables and signal cables must each have their own individual conduits 2 In the same way when grouping the cables power and signal cables should not be bunched together Important points 1 Earthing Indoor unit Outdoor unit Earth line Earth line V1039 m Have the indoor and outdoor units both been earthed If the apparatus is not properly earthed then there is always a risk of electric shocks The earthing of the apparatus must be carried out by a qualified person 54 General Information Si39 303 Installation 3 2 11 Duct Work Indoor Taking Account of Noise and Vibration W Operational steps Install indoor unit Connect ducts wmm Fit inlets and outlets V1040 a Canvas joints must be used between the main unit and the air suction and discharge ducts These gt fittings designed to inhibit secondary noise resulting from the transmission of vibrations and operating noise from the main unit to the ducts or to the rest of the building Suspension bolts Canvas duct Canvas duct V1041 The speed of the airflow should be taken into account when choosing air suction and distribution grills in order to keep wind noise to minimum Important points The air discharge duct must be thermally insulated The canvas duct on the inlet side must be
151. ansion and contraction Situation Refrigerant piping has developed cracks in soldered points and is leaking gas Cause Both ends of the pipe have been tightly fixed in place Starting and stopping the compressor has caused temperature to vary thus the pipes have expanded and contracted which places stress on soldered parts 4 Cracks have formed because of repeated expansion and contraction Remedial Action Fit the pipe with a loop as shown in the below drawing Tightly fixed 320 Cracks developed here i 12m Absorb expansion in soldered parts C with loop Tightly fixed m Y Before remedial action After remedial action V1102 Main Points m Take thermal expansion and contraction along the spline into consideration when installing pipe supports For Your Expansion m Full length x Coefficient of thermal expansion x Rise in temperature Reference Coefficient of thermal expansion for copper 16 5 x 10 Example For a pipe length of 10 m and a rise in temperature of 50 C expansion reaches 8 2 mm General Information 149 Appendix Si39 303 7 12 7 Example 7 Transmission wiring between the cool heat selector and the outdoor unit is too close to a high voltage wire Situation Cause and Remedial Action Main Points Heating is indicated despite having selected cooling with the cool heat selector The transmission wiring between the cool heat selector and th
152. appen m Improper installation or attachment of equipment or accessories could result in electric shock short circuit leaks fire or other damage to the equipment Be sure only to use accessories made by Daikin which are specifically designed for use with the equipment and have them installed by a professional m Ask your dealer to move and reinstall the air conditioner Incomplete installation may result in a water leakage electric shock and fire m Do not use the air conditioner for other purposes In order to avoid any quality deterioration do not use the unit for cooling precision instruments food plants animals or works of art m In order to avoid injury do not remove the fan guard W Toavoid oxygen deficiency ventilate the room sufficiently if equipment with burner is used together with the air conditioner Operation Manual 199 Safety Cautions Si39 303 After a long use check the unit stand and fitting for damage If they are left in a damaged condition the unit may fall and result in injury Neither place a flammable spray bottle near the air conditioner nor perform spraying Doing so may result in a fire Before cleaning be sure to stop the operation turn the breaker off or pull out the supply cord Otherwise an electric shock and injury may result Do not operate the air conditioner with a wet hand An electric shock may result In order to avoid electric shock fire injury or damaging the uni
153. arrying out piping work in the field Be sure that the local piping does not touch other pipes the bottom panel or side panel Especially for the bottom and side connection be sure to protect the local piping with the provided insulation to prevent it from coming into contact with the casing Precautions when knocking out knock holes n Notes m Be sure to avoid damaging the casing After knocking out the holes we recommend you paint the edges and areas around the edges using the repair paint to prevent rusting When passing electrical wiring through the knock holes wrap the wiring with protective tape to prevent damage Open knock holes around the 4 concave knock holes in the base frame using a 6mm bit drill Knock hole Drill uf Make sure to perform the piping installation within the range of the maximum allowable pipe length allowable level difference and allowable length after branching as indicated in chapter Example of connection For installation of the refrigerant branching kit refer to the installation manual delivered with the kit Mount the REFNET joint so that it branches either horizontally or vertically Ss 1 Horizontal wires 2 Up to 30x or vertically 1 e j 2 A arrow diagram Mount the REFNET header so that it branches horizontally 3 Horizontal wires NE B arrow diagram Pipe connection e Only use the flare nuts included with the unit Using different flar
154. as that of before power failure For the above reasons when the unit is set enabling to utilize Auto restart function after power failure reset utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation N Caution 1 The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or the main power supply turned on again Consequently the user might be surprised with question for the reason why 2 In the service work for example turning off the main power switch during the unit is in operation and turning on the switch again after the work is completed start the unit operation the fan rotates 72 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation Air Flow Adjustment Ceiling Height Air Flow Direction Setting Setting of Air Flow Direction Adjustment Make the following setting according to the ceiling height The setting position No is set to 01 at the factory m Inthe Case of FXHQ Mode No Switch Soling Position Setting 01 Wall mounted type Standard 13 23 0 02 Wall mounted type Slight increase 03 Wall mounted type Normal increase m Inthe Case of FXFQ25 80 Mode First Second Ceiling height N code code Setting 9 No No 4 way Outlets 3 way Outlets 2 way Outlets 01 Standard N Lowerthan 2 7 m Lower than 3 0 m Lower than 3 5 m 13 23 0 02 High Ceiling H Lower
155. assing through the unit A liquid pipe 6 Flushing W Block the end of the pipe with the insulation of your hand l W When the gas pressure becomes too great to contain remove insulation quickly First flush m Block the end of the pipe with insulation again Carry out second flushing Gas pressure of 0 5 MPa Wood Insulation V0974 20 General Information Si39 303 Installation Choice of Materials for Refrigerant Piping The nature and amount of the extraneous material inside the pipe can be checked during flushing by placing a rag lightly over the end of the pipe In the unlikely case that even a small quantity of moisture is found then the inside of the pipe should be dried out thoroughly Action 1 Flush the inside of the pipe with nitrogen gas Until such time as the moisture disappears 2 Carry out a thorough vacuum drying operation See page 31 Close the main valve on the nitrogen cylinder 2 Repeat the above operation for unit B 3 When the liquid pipe operations have been completed then do the same with the gas pipes a Refrigerant piping W The piping used must meet the requirements of the JIS standard or equivalent Size material thickness etc Specification Oxidized phosphorous seamless copper pipe m Long pipe lengths or coiled pipe copper pipe with heat insulation coating should be used to avoid the necessity for frequent brazing Make sure the thickness and material shall be selec
156. ating Noise of Indoor Units 106 7 2 Piping Installation PF OUT tutus ieiuno d dte fce 108 7 3 Allowable Piping Legi uiuo irr ria ili 110 7 4 Refrigerant branch kit 2 113 7 5 Pipe size selection 115 7 6 How to calculate the additional refrigerant to be charged 117 7 7 Outdoor Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit 119 7 8 REFNET Pipe Connections for VRV II R410A Series 126 7 9 VRV Inspection Sheet ett 129 7 10 Piping System Diagrams 134 7 11 Wiring mmm 138 7 12 Bad Examples and Good Examples in Installation 144 Part 2 Installation Manual 153 1 0 155 1 4 Combination 155 Table of Contents i Si39 303 OL T O IN 1 2 Standard Operation Limit ee tenes 156 1 8 Standard Supplied Accessories 156 1 4 Option Accessory u s dco De M bmi st esi ded 157 1 5 Technical Specifications e eb t E btts 158 1 6 Electrical Specifications cr vd o F
157. ation 207 Leak 175 Cracks develop field pipes due to thermal expansion and contraction 149 M Cylinder specifications 224 Main 161 Mismatch between cables connecting indoor and D outdoor units and corresponding piping 145 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes 72 Monitor 86 Drain Pipe Gradient and 38 Drain pipe trap shape defective 146 Drain Pipe Work Indoor 38 Operating Noise of Indoor Units 106 Drain Piping for Each Model Operation Mode 78 Ceiling Mounted Built in Type FXSQ M 47 Operation 206 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type Operation When Power is Turned 65 2 45 Option 157 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Optional Parts Cool Heat Selector 180 FXCQ M Double flow 40 Outdoor Unit PC Board 66 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Type FXFQ M Multi flow 43 P Ceiling Mounted Duct Type FXMQ
158. between outdoor unit and refrigerant branch kit part A RXYQ5 type 15 9 x 0 99 RXYQ8 type 19 1 x 0 80 9 5 x 0 80 RXYQ10 type 22 2 x 0 80 ee TEL type rer 12 7 x 0 80 15 9 x 0 99 RXYQZG cR 84 9 x 1 21 34 type RXYQ36 48 type 41 3 x 1 43 Piping between refrigerant branch kits Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity of all the indoor units connected below this Do notlet the connection piping exceed the refrigerant piping size chosen by general system model name Unit mm T Piping size outer diameter x minimum thickness indoor capacity index Gas pipe Liquid pipe 200 615 9 x 0 99 S 200 lt x lt 290 22 2 x 0 80 09 9 0 290 lt x lt 420 mom 012 7 x 0 80 420 lt x lt 640 015 9 x 0 99 640 x lt 920 034 9 x 1 21 920 lt 041 3 x 1 43 919 1 x 0 80 Piping between outdoor branches part B Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity of all the Unit mm outdoor units connected above this Gutdoor capacity index Piping size outer diameter x minimum thickness Liquid pipe lt 22HP 28 6 x 0 99 615 9 x 0 99 2288 34 9 1 21 26 lt 019 1 x 0 80 Between refrigerant branch kit indoor unit Pipe size for direct connection to indoor unit must be the same as the connection size of indoor unit
159. ci df e 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 Indoor units 1 8 If the outdoor unit is 019 1 30m 9 5 x 10m 0 6 4x 10 j 96 4 x 10m RXYQSAMY 1B and the b 915 9x10m e 9 9 5x10m 64x20m k 06 4x Apa lengths are as at 9 5x10m f 9 5x10m i 912 7 x 10m rig 30 0 25 10 0 17 10 0 11 40 0 054 40 0 022 6 7 358 t 2 b j c d e f g h j k 75 Note The amount of refrigerant to be added to the unit should be written on the included Added Refrigerant plate and attached to the rear side of the front cover Refer next page General Information 117 Appendix Si39 303 Y REQUEST FOR THE INDICATION OF ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT CHARGING AMOUNT AND INSTALLATION DATE gt N BE SURE TO FILL THE BLANKS WHICH ARE NEEDED FOR AFTER SALE SERVICES CALCULATION OF ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT e CALCULATE THE ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT CHARGING AMOUNT BASED ON THE FORMULAE BELOW CHARGING AMOUNT BEFORE REFRIGERANT SUPPLY OR CHRAGING WHEN RE CHARGING TOTAL AMOUNT OF REFRIGERANT CHARGE THE TOTAL OF THE AMOUNT CHARGED OUTDOOR UNIT AT SHIPMENT INDICATED ON THE MACHINE NAMEPLATE AND THE ADDITIONAL AMOUNT SHOWN AS FOLLOWS ADDITIONAL CHARGING TOTAL LENGTH OF LIQUID TOTAL LENGTH OF LIQUID TOTAL LENGTH OF LIQUID AMOUN
160. city Vacuum Drying Air Expulsion i 0 02 mmHg 100 l min Suitable Suitable 10 mmHg Oilless Rotary 50 l min Unsuitable Suitable No Need of Oil 0 02 mmH g 40 l min Suitable Suitable Many handy pumps fall into this category General Information 33 Installation Si39 303 Vacuum Drying There are two vacuum drying methods and the appropriate one should always be chosen to conform with Procedure individual local conditions Normal vacuum drying The standard method Operational steps 1 Vacuum drying 1st time Connect a manifold gauge to the service port of the liquid or gas pipe and operate the vacuum pump for at least 2 hours The degree of vacuum produced should be in excess of 5 mmHg If after 2 hours the vacuum produced has not exceeded 5 mmHg then either there is moisture in the pipe or there is a leak Operate the vacuum pump for a further hour If even after 3 hours the vacuum has not reached 5 mmHg then check the system for a leak 2 Carry out maintained vacuum test Produce a vacuum in excess of 755 mmHg and do not release it for an hour or more Check the vacuum gauge to make sure that it has not risen If the gauge does rise then there is still moisture in the pipe or there is a leak somewhere 3 Additional charge of refrigerant Connect the charging cylinder to the liquid pipe service port and charge with the required amount of refrigerant 4 Open stop valve to the full
161. cts easily with sulfur to form BCup 2 Phosphor 25 2BD required a fragile water soluble compound and copper solder 840 0 2 should not therefore be used where the environment is not suitable 5 BAg 2 700 Approx 0 05 Gas NEiS NEiS Suitable for environments with a high Silver solder l 20 t 107 103 sulfur content 845 0 2 2 4 This is used under normal conditions V0976 The R410A Heat Pump RXYQ M Series uses a wide range of piping sizes You should therefore be careful when selecting the nozzle tip If a small nozzle tip is used for brazing piping of large diameters such as 38 1 and 0644 5 brazing flow becomes poor Table 1 Correlation of nozzle tip and size of refrigeration piping Nozzle tip No Brazing filler diameter 200 225 250 315 400 450 500 1 6 2 4 3 2 6 4 95 12 7 7S 15 9 J E 19 1 2 22 2 25 4 E 28 6 31 8 27 LJ 34 9 38 1 os 41 3 27 Note 0977 The values in the table above are for type torch French 22 General Information Si39 303 Installation Brazing a Brazing work should be carried out such that the final result is directed either downwards or sideways An upward direction should be avoided wherever possible to preven
162. cy operation Setting for the slave unit 2 operation prohibition in multi outdoor unit system Used to temporarily prohibit the applicable outdoor unit from operating should there be any faulty part in multi outdoor unit system Since the comfortable environment is extremely impaired prompt replacement of the part is required General Information 83 Test Operation Si39 303 Setting item display No m MODE TEST C H selection LOW Demand Setting condition display etung H1P H2P IND Master Slave 10156 pp H3P H5P H6P Factory set EMG emergency Normal operation 090000 0 0 operation INV compressor N operation inhibited Emergency operation OE E E E JOR Address 0 O e o o 0e O0 O Cool Heat Binary number 1 0000000 Unified address 6 digits 5 3 Address 0 O e oe oe o O0 O i Binary number 1 2 Lownoise demana e y OK E E E E FO 6 digits 3 Normal operation 5 Indoor forced fan H O oE E EE E JO Indoor forced fan H OR E E E JOR Indoor forced Normal operation O K E E E KOR 6 operation Indoor forced operation OR E E E JOR High 8 setting ormal factory setting Te setti Normal f i Low OK E AAE EO Hig
163. d Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Liquid Vapor Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 223 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 1 2 Refrigerant Cylinders Cylinder specifications The cylinder is painted refrigerant color pink The cylinder valve is equipped with a siphon tube Cylinder l Siphon tube Refrigerant can be charged in liquid state with cylinder in upright position Caution Do not lay cylinder on its side during charging since it cause refrigerant in gas state to enter the system m Handling of cylinders 1 Laws and regulations R410A is liquefied gas and the High Pressure Gas Safety Law must be observed in handling them Before using refer to the High Pressure Gas Safety Law The Law stipulates standards and regulations that must be followed to prevent accidents with high pressure gases Be sure to follow the regulations 2 Handing of vessels Since R410A is high pressure gas it is contained in high pressure vessels Although those vessels are durable and strong careless handling can cause damage that can lead to unexpected accidents Do not drop vessels let them fall apply impact or roll them on the ground 3 Storage Although R410A is not flammable it must be stored in a well ventilated cool and dark place in the same way as any other high pressure gases It should also be noted that high pressure vessels are equipped with safety devices that r
164. d out in strict accrdance with control switches circuit diagrams Outdoor unit foundation work teen The foundation must be level U _ Deere tuoi Avoid short circuits and ensure sufficient space is D allowed for servicing Must be carried out in strict accrdance with control Setting of outdoor unit setting circuit diagrams switch Sequence start low noise input Cooing Heating y selection refrigerant piping lenglh etc Airtighttest ttt In the final check for 24 hours at 3 80 MPa there must D be no drop in pressure Vacuumdrying The vacuum pump used must have a capacity of 2 reaching at least 5 mmHg Addtional charge of refrigerant vest The amount of refrigerant to be added to the unit should be calculated and written on the Added Refrigerant plate and D attached to the rear side of the front cover Fit decoration panels 00 0 Make sure there are no gaps left between the facing matarials used on the ceiling x Test run adjustment Run each indoor unit in turn to make sure the pipework tg has been fitted correctly Transfer to customer with je Explain the use of the system as clearly as possible to explanation your customer and make sure all relevant documentation is in order V1351 The above list indicates the order in which the individual work operations are normally carried out but this order may be varied w
165. d soldering work practice M 2 Air tight test lt Leak from flared area Adhere strictly to standard flaring work Leak from flange area Adhere strictly to standard flange connection work parctice V0964 The 3 principles of refrigerant piping Dry Clean Air tight Make sure there is no moisture inside the pipes Make sure there is no dirt inside the pipe Make sure the refrigerant does not leak out AA gt lt M 0965 S oso V1148 V1149 General Information 17 Installation Si39 303 Method for Replacing Nitrogen Brazing v NM If brazing work is carried out without passing nitrogen gas through the pipes which being brazed then this allows the formation of oxidation bubbles on the inside surface of the pipes These oxidation bubbles are then carried along inside the pipes to cause damage to various members of the system such as valves or compressors and the system ceases to function properly In order to avoid this problem nitrogen is passed through the pipes while the soldering work is being carried out This operation is known as nitrogen replacement Air is replaced by nitrogen This is standard work practice for all brazing work Pressure regulator Copper pipe 1 4 Packless valve X High pressure hose Nitrogen cylinder V0966 Packless valve Outdoor unit Hose
166. d state through the liquid stop valve service port Taking into account following instructions 1 Check that gas and liquid stop valves are closed 2 Stop the compressor and charge the specified weight of refrigerant m f the outdoor unit is not in operation and the total amount cannot be charged follow the procedures for additional refrigerant charge shown below m Make sure to use installation tools you exclusively use on R410A installations to withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials from mixing into the system m Procedures for charging additional refrigerant 178 Installation Manual Si39 303 One outdoor unit installed In case of RXYQ5 16MY1B Pressure reducing valve Nitrogen Tank Siphon system Measuring instrument Vacuum pump Valve A Gas side Outdoor unit Liquid side Indoor unit Shutoff valve service port Charge hose To indoor unit Oil equalizing line Valve B Dotted lines represent onsite piping When multiple outdoor units installed In case of RXYQ18 48MY1B al N 1 1 I I 1 I 1 1 E NX E 4 aA s N Additional refrigerant charge procedure To learn the system settings for additional refrigerant charging refer to the Service Precaution label attached on the back of the elec
167. djustable 310 or less to o N F 2 Drain raising pipe 600 or less Clamp metal attached Drain hose attached V0619 m f converging multiple drain pipes install according to the procedure shown below 100 mm or more T joint converging drain pipes V0620 Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit 2 After piping work is finished check drainage flows smoothly m Open the water inlet lid add approximately 2500 cc of water gradually and check drainage flow Portable pump Water inlet Water inlet lid Refrigerant piping Open Bucket V0621 WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED W Check drainage flow during COOL running explained under TEST OPERATION 41 General Information Installation Si39 303 WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED m Remove the electric parts box lid connect a power supply and remote controller to the terminals Refer to the How to CONNECT WIRINGS Refer to Installation Manual Next press the inspection test operation button on the remote controller The unit will engage the test operation mode Press the operation mode selector button until selecting FAN OPERATION ee Then press the ON OFF button 1 The indoor unit fan and drain pump will start up Check that the water has drained from the unit Press to go
168. door unit A Outdoor unit B GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 1 Attaching outdoor unit GAS SIDE ATTACHED PIPE 3 Attaching outdoor unit OIL PIPE Field supply GAS SIDE PIPE Field supply LIQUID SIDE PIPE Field supply Refer to P 120 for Table 4 and 5 e BHFP22M135 Be sure to secure space for brazing and piping work under the outdoor unit General Information 125 Appendix Si39 303 7 8 Pipe Connections for VRV II R410A Series 7 8 1 REFNET Joint KHRP26M22T Gas Side 041241 Insul ee Insulation I 9 nsulation Mui s l ra DESI Ea TY EE P Sas a 1 D 15 9 09147 338 H 42 380 1104191 0 0815 9 u V3041 KHRP26M33T Gas Side Liquid Side Insulation 108191 12812 1 Insulation 6 5 Boum ee 024159 Le C Se AG 3
169. door unit manual m When the display shows gt time to clean the air filter ask a qualified service person to clean the filters Refer to the chapter Maintenance in the indoor unit manual W Keep the indoor unit and remote control at least 1 m away from televisions radios stereos and other similar equipment Failing to do so may cause static or distorted pictures Do not place items under the indoor unit which may be damaged by water Condensation may form if the humidity is above 80 or if the drain outlet gets blocked 214 Operation Manual Si39 303 Following Symptoms are not Air Conditioner Troubles 8 Following Symptoms are not Air Conditioner Troubles 8 1 The System does not operate The air conditioner does not start immediately after the ON OFF button on the remote controller is pushed If the operation lamp lights the system is in normal condition To prevent overloading of the compressor motor the air conditioner starts 5 minutes after it is turned ON again in case it was turned OFF just before The same starting delay occurs after the operation mode selector button was used m If Centralized Control is displayed on the remote control and pressing the operation button causes the display to blink for a few seconds This indicates that the central device is controlling the unit The blinking display indicates that the remote control cannot be used m The system does not start immediately afte
170. e you may use the same vacuum pump but if you want to save time you will have to use a pump with higher exhaust velocity exhaust volume The Necessity for Counter Flow Prevention After the vacuum process of the refrigerant cycle the inside of the hose will be vacuumed after stopping the vacuum pump and the vacuum pump oil may flow back Moreover if the vacuum pump stops during the operation by some reason the same thing happens In such cases different oil mixes in the HFC system refrigerant apparatus cycle and becomes the cause of a refrigerant circuit trouble Therefore in order to prevent the counter flow from the vacuum pump a check valve is needed Vacuum pump with check valve or vacuum pump adapter Vacuum pump adapter Reverse flow preventive vacuum adapter Vacuum pump with check valve 1 Vacuum pump performance The 2 most import things for determining vacuum pump performance are as follows 1 Exhaust velocity 2 Degree of vacuum 1 Exhaust velocity Exhaust volume is usually expressed as l min or m3 h The larger the number the faster vacuum id achieved Generally speaking the faster the exhaust velocity the larger and heavier the vacuum pump itself is Commercially available vacuum pumps exhaust velocity of 20 30 l min usually take an extremely long time to achieve vacuum We recommend a vacuum pump of approx 60 100 l min 2 Degree of vacuum Ultimate vacuum varies largely according to use of th
171. e 2 No 02 03 04 10 20 0 Filter contamination heavy Super Approx Heavy Approx light Setting for display long life 10 000 5 000 time to clean air filter filter hrs hrs Sets display time to clean air filter to half when there is pond We Ap i ap 250 heavy filter contamination irs hrs Standard Approx Approx filter 200 100 hrs hrs 1 Long life filter type Long life filter Super long life filter 2 Thermostat sensor in remote controller No use 3 Display time to clean air filter Display No display calculation Set when filter sign is not to be displayed 12 22 0 Optional accessories output selection Indoor unit Operationoutput Malfunction field selection of output for adaptor for turned ON by output wiring thermostat 1 ON OFF input from outside Set when Forced OFF ON OFF control ON OFF is to be controlled from outside 2 Thermostat differential changeover 1 C 0 5 C Set when remote sensor is to be used 3 OFF by thermostat fan speed Set fan speed Automatic mode differential automatic 01 0 03 2 04 3 05 4 06 5 07 6 08 7 temperature differential setting for VRV system heat recovery series cool heat 5 Power failure automatic reset i Equipped 13 23 0 High air outlet velocity H s Set when installed in place with ceiling higher than 2 7 m 1 Selection of air flow direction F 4 directions T 3 directions W 2 direction
172. e 2F01 2F02 9 Model central contol panel 22 2 gt 2ndfloor 1 22 2 V 2nd floor office 2 reception room 2 M disign room C 4th floor office 2 V0955 General Information 13 Installation Si39 303 3 Installation 3 1 Step by Step Installation Procedure Operations Points Determination of division of work Indicate clearly who is to be responsible for switch iX settings Preparation of contract drawings Make relationship between outdoor indoor remote controller and option connections clear Prepare control circuit diagrams Sleeve andinsertwork jJ vsvvv666e Take account of gradient of drain piping orm 2 Installationofindoorunit O O Check model name to make sure the fitting is made correctl Refrigerant piping work Special attention to dryness cleanness and tightness 9 Drain pipework Adjust to downward gradient 9 Ductwork 220220222222 Make sure airflow is sufficient Heat insulation work WL Make sure no gaps are left where the insulating materials joined Electrical work connection circuits Multiple core cable must not be used Suitable cable and drive circuits should be selected Setting of indoorunitsetting uu Must be carrie
173. e address is 010110 binary number which translates to 16 4 2 22 base 10 number In other words the address is 22 000 ie The number of terminal blocks for No 12 and 13 is expressed as an 8 digit binary number which is the combination of four upper and four lower digits for No 12 and 13 respectively 0 128 In the address for No 12 is 0101 the address for No 13 is 1 0110 and the combination of the two is 01010110 binary number which translates to 64 16 4 2 86 base 10 number In other words the number of terminal block is 86 i 64 No 12 128 32 900 e000 4 No13 8 2 See the preceding page for a list of data etc for No 0 22 General Information 87 Test Operation Si39 303 4 4 2 2 Cool Heat Mode Switching There are the following 5 cool heat switching modes Set cool heat separately for each outdoor unit system by indoor unit remote controller Set cool heat separately for each outdoor unit system by cool heat switching remote controller Set cool heat for more than one outdoor unit system simultaneously in accordance with unified master outdoor unit by indoor unit remote controller Set cool heat for more than one outdoor unit system simultaneously in accordance with unified master outdoor unit by cool heat switching remote controller Set Cool Heat Separately for Each Outdoor System by Indoor Unit Remote Controller It does not matte
174. e amount of refrigerant to be added to the unit should be written on the included Added Refrigerant plate and attached to the rear side of the front cover Insulation test of the main power circuit Using a megatester for 500V check that the insulation resistance of 2 or more is attained by applying a voltage of 500V DC between power terminals and earth Never use the megatester for the transmission wiring Installation date Be sure to keep record of the installation date on the sticker on the electric box lid according to EN60335 2 40 Installation Manual 191 Before Operation Si39 303 8 2 Test Run Caution After completing installation be sure to open the valve Operating the unit with the valve shut will break the compressor Power supply connection When running the unit for the first time after installation be sure to perform a test run following these steps for test run Not performing a test run when the unit is first installed may prevent the unit from operating properly e During the operation monitor the outdoor unit operation status and check for any incorrect wiring 1 Turn ON the power to the outdoor I units and indoor units 1 1 Make sure to turn ON the power 6 hours before starting the operation This is necessary to warm the crankcase preliminarily by the electric heater is performed normally 2 Check the LED on the P board A1P in the outdoor unit to see if
175. e degree of the vacuum is increased If the boiling point is reduced to a level below that of the ambient temperature then the moisture in the pipes will evaporate Boiling point Pressure of water mmHg Pa Torr 40 705 7333 55 30 724 4800 36 26 7 735 3333 25 24 4 738 3066 22 22 2 740 2666 20 20 6 742 2400 18 17 8 745 2000 15 rampe 15 0 747 1733 13 labio one the degree 11 7 750 1333 10 of vacuum must be lowered below 75 2mmHg ES 7 2 752 1066 8 0 755 667 5 Gauge pressure kg cm Above figures mmHg are gauge pressure readings Absolute pressure mmHg 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Temperature gt OmmHg V0990 The evacuation of air conditioner piping provides the following effects 1 Vacuum drying 2 Removes air and nitrogen used in air tightness test from the inside of pipes Therefore it is necessary to ensure that the both purposes have been achieved in the vacuum drying operation Key points Lower the degree of vacuum to below 755mmHg V1216 General Information 31 Installation Si39 303 Choosing a Vacuum Pump Degree of vacuum must be within the range expressed by General Refrigerant piping content volume of the VRVII R410A Series is larger than the VRV Inverter Series and consequently takes more time for vacuum drying If you have time to spar
176. e nuts may cause the refrigerant to leak e Besure to perform a nitrogen blow when brazing Brazing without performing nitrogen replacement or releasing nitrogen into the piping will create large quantities of oxidized film on the inside of the pipes adversely affecting valves and compressors in the refrigerating system and preventing normal operation e Do not use a flux when brazing the refrigerant pipe joints Use phosphor copper brazing BCup which does not require flux Using a chlorine flux may cause the pipes to corrode and if it contains fluoride it may cause the refrigerant lubricant to deteriorate adversely affecting the refrigerant piping system The pressure regulator for the nitrogen released when doing the brazing should be set to 0 02 MPa 0 2kg cme or less 1 Refrigerant piping 2 Location to be brazed 3 Nitrogen 4 Taping 5 Manual valve 6 Regulator 7 Nitrogen Installation Manual 169 Refrigerant Piping Si39 303 Protection against contamination when installing pipes e Take measures to prevent foreign materials like moisture and contamination from mixing into the system Place Installation period Protection method More than a month Pinch the pipe Outdoor ER ESSS e manih Pinch or tape the pipe Indoor Regardless of the period RE e Great caution is needed when passing copper tubes through walls Precautions when selecting branch piping m Ifthe piping bet
177. e outdoor unit is too close to a high voltage wire An induced voltage is therefore being impressed on the transmission wiring which is causing a heating cooling malfunction in the outdoor unit PC board Outdoor unit High voltage wire Transmission wiring low voltage wire Cool heat selector V1103 Bypassing the transmission wiring will allow the unit to function normally W Keep low and high voltage wiring away from each another 7 12 8 Example 8 The centralized control group number cannot be set Inverter K Series Situation Cause Remedial Action An attempt was made to set the centralized control group number with the indoor unit remote controller but 00 cannot be selected in the field setting mode 1 The central remote controller or unified ON OFF controller is OFF 2 The central remote controller or unified ON OFF controller or indoor unit is not wired to the centralized control line F1 amp F2 2 deem x q Field setting ode k V1104 Supply power to either the central remote controller or unified ON OFF controller Wire the central remote controller or unified ON OFF controller or indoor unit to the centralized control line Main Points m When communications with the central remote controller are down 00 cannot be selected in the field setting mode W Activate power to the central remote contro
178. e this noise Alow sah choro choro sound is heard while the indoor unit is stopped When the other indoor unit is in operation this noise is heard In order to prevent oil and refrigerant from remaining in the system a small amount of refrigerant is kept flowing Indoor unit outdoor unit m Acontinuous low hissing sound is heard when the system is in cooling or defrost operation This is the sound of refrigerant gas flowing through both indoor and outdoor units Ahissing sound which is heard at the start or immediately after stopping operation or defrost operation This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow stop or flow change Dust comes out of the Unit When the unit is used for the first time in a long time This is because dust has gotten into the unit Outdoor unit When the tone of operating noise changes This noise is caused by the change of frequency The Units can Give off Odours The unit can absorb the smell of rooms furniture cigarettes etc and then emit it again 8 10 The Outdoor Unit Fan does not Spin m During operation The speed of the fan is controlled in order to optimize product operation 216 Operation Manual Si39 303 Following Symptoms are not Air Conditioner Troubles 8 11 The Display Shows 88 This is the case immediately after the main power supply switch is turned on means that the remote controller is in normal condition This continues for one
179. e to eliminate the need for turning it upside down Siphon tube Siphon tube V0998 36 General Information Si39 303 Installation Non azeotropic refrigerants or Quasi azeotropic refrigerants gt When a refrigerant is a mixture of two or more types with different evaporation temperature it is called a non azeotropic refrigerant If all refrigerant components evaporate at the same temperature the mixture is called an azeotropic refrigerant If a non azeotropic refrigerant is charged into equipment in the gaseous state the refrigerant components that evaporate sooner than others enter the equipment and the refrigerant that evaporate after others remain in the refrigerant cylinder Quasi azeotropic mixture refrigerant mixture of two or more refrigerants having similar boiling points Caution items The following devices designed for R 22 cannot be used to charge the new refrigerants Be sure to use the devices specifically designed for the new refrigerants 1 Charging cylinder Pressure resisting specification is different 2 Gauge manifold including hose same as above General Information 37 Installation Si39 303 3 2 8 Drain Pipe Work Indoor Drain Pipe Gradient and Support Drain Trap W Operational steps Check for water Install indoor unit Connect drain pipe wp mm insulate drain pipe leaks V0999 a The d
180. e to high frequency waves Therefore never install a phase advancing capacitor Keep power imbalance within 2 of the supply rating 1 Large imbalance will shorten the life of the smoothing capacitor 2 As a protective measure the product will stop operating and an error indication will be made when power imbalance exceeds 4 of the supply rating Follow the electrical wiring diagram when carrying out any electrical wiring Only proceed with wiring work after blocking off all power Always ground wires In accordance with national regulations of the pertinent country Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes sewage pipes lightning rods or telephone ground wires e Gas pipes can explode or catch fire if there is a gas leak e Sewage pipes no grounding effect is possible if hard plastic piping is used e Telephone ground wires and lightning rods dangerous when struck by lightning due to abnormal rise in electrical potential in the grounding This unit uses an inverter and therefore generates noise which will have to be reduced to avoid interfering with other devices The outer casing of the product may take on an electrical charge due to leaked electrical current which will have to be discharged with the grounding Be sure to install an earth leak detector One that can handle higher harmonics This unit uses an inverter which means that an earth leak detector capable handling high harmonics in order to prevent ma
181. e vacuum pump Vacuum pumps used for vacuum forming cannot be used for vacuum drying A vacuum pump with a high degree of vacuum is required When selecting a vacuum you should select one which is capable of achieving 0 2 Torr of ultimate vacuum Degree of vacuum is expressed in Torr micron nnHg and Pascal Pa The units correlate as follows Unit Standard atmospheric pressure Perfect vacuum Gauge Pressure kg cm2 0 1 033 Absolute Pressure kg cm2 abs 1 033 0 Torr Torr 760 0 Micron Micron 760000 0 mmHg mmHg 0 760 Pa hPa 1013 33 0 A A A 0 Torr 5 Torr 760 Torr 667 1013 33 hPa 760 mmHg 755 mmHg 0 mmHg Perfect vacuum Vacuum target value Standard atmospheric pressure V0992 32 General Information Si39 303 Installation 2 Vacuum pump maintenance Because of their nature most vacuum pumps contain large amounts of oil which lubricates bearings etc and functions to enhance airtightness of pistons When using a vacuum pump to discharge air from refrigerant piping moisture in the air tends to get mixed in with the oil You must therefore change oil periodically and make sure the proper oil level is maintained Perform periodic inspections in accordance with the operating instructions 3 Degree of vacuum measurement An extremely accurate vacuum gauge is required to test de
182. eak check tightening pipe size torque Nem mm flare shape 9 5 3270 3990 12 8 13 2 012 7 4950 6030 16 2 16 6 015 9 6180 7540 19 3 19 7 Not recommendable but in case of emergency You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench you may follow the installation method mentioned below After the work is finished make sure to check that there is no gas leak When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner there is a point where the tightening torque suddenly increases From that position further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below Pipe size Further tightening angle Recommended arm length of tool 9 5 3 8 60 to 90 degrees Approx 200 mm 12 7 1 2 30 to 60 degrees Approx 250 mm 19 1 5 8 30 to 60 degrees Approx 300 mm Disposal requirements Dismantling of the unit treatment of the refrigerant oil and eventual other parts should be done in accordance with the relevant local and national regulations 6 5 Pipe Insulation After finishing the leak test and vacuum drying the piping must be insulated Take into account the following points m Make sure to insulate the connection piping and refrigerant branch kits entirely m Be sure to insulate the liquid side and gas side piping for the inter unit piping and the refrigerant branch kits and always use Q18 type or better insulation for the oil
183. eck if there are too many occupants in the room during cooling operation 218 Operation Manual Si39 303 Troubleshooting W Check if the heat source of the room is excessive m Check if direct sunlight enters the room Use curtains or blinds W Check if the air flow angle is not proper Operation Manual 219 Troubleshooting Si39 303 220 Operation Manual Si39 303 Part 4 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 1 Precautions for New Refrigerant 10 222 CUMS en aset 222 1 2 Refrigerant Cylinders e Red aei Lb pus 224 1 3 Serice Tool m Dm 225 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 221 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 1 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 11 Outline 1 1 1 About Refrigerant R410A W Characteristics of new refrigerant R410A 1 Performance Almost the same performance as R22 and R407C 2 Pressure Working pressure is approx 1 4 times more than R22 and R407C 3 Refrigerant composition Few problems in composition control since it is a Quasi azeotropic mixture refrigerant HFC units Units using new refrigerants HCFC units Refrigerant name R407C R410A R22 Non azeotropic mixture Quasi azeotropic mixture lt z Composing of HFC32 125 and ofHFC32 and JFC125
184. ected BS units 9 e lower Push the RETURN button BS3 to 11 Ouo unt S O O Lordi display different data of set items AEN 12 Number of terminal blocks o o 1 4 digits 13 Number of terminal blocks Q O O e rower 4 digits Setting item 0 Display contents of Number of units for sequential start and others Number of units for sequential 1 unit start 2 units 3 units Push the RETURN button BS3 and 9 e o e 9 switches to the initial status of EMG operation backup ON e o Monitor mode operation setting OFF e e Defrost select setting Short e p oO e Push the MODE button BS1 and Medium returns to Setting mode 1 o e e Long V276 Were Im setting H o o M e eO L oo Tc setting H L e 86 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation Push the SET button and match with the LEDs No 1 15 push the RETURN button and enter the data for each setting Data such as addresses and number of units is expressed as binary numbers the two ways of expressing are as follows The No 1 cool heat unified address is expressed as a binary number consisting of the lower 6 digits 0 63 In th
185. efrigerant branching kit refer to 6 Refrigerant Piping Work Installation Manual 157 Introduction Si39 303 1 5 Technical Specifications General RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B RXYQ14MY1B RXYGQ16MY1B Nominal cooling capacity kW 14 0 224 28 0 33 5 40 0 44 5 Nominal heating capacity kW 16 0 25 0 31 5 37 5 45 0 50 0 Nominal input cooling heating kW 3 79 4 34 6 97 6 89 9 00 9 31 10 6 10 8 14 3 12 9 15 6 14 0 Dimensions Exhorts mm 1600x635x765 1600x930x765 1600x930x765 1600x1240x765 1600x1240x765 1600x1240x765 Weight kg 160 230 230 281 323 325 Refrigerant gas pipe inch 5 8 6 8 7 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 Cbaitebliona mm 15 9 19 1 222 28 6 28 6 28 6 Refrigerant liquid inch 3 8 3 8 3 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 pipe mm 69 5 9 5 9 5 127 12 7 12 7 Compressor RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B RXYQ14MY1B 16 1 Oil type Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Synthetic ether oil Oil charge volume 1 2 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 1 9 1 6 1 6 Crankcase heater w 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 Refrigerant type R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A R410A Refrigerant charge kg 5 6 8 6 9 6 11 4 12 9 14 4 Nominal air flow n min 75 175 180 210 210 210 Fan motor output w 350 750 750 750 750 750 General
186. eleases gas when the ambient temperature reaches more than a certain level fusible plug melts and when the pressure exceeds a certain level spring type safety valve operates 224 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 1 3 Service Tools R410A is used under higher working pressure compared to previous refrigerants R22 R407C Furthermore the refrigerating machine oil has been changed from Suniso oil to Ether oil and if oil mixing is occurred sludge results in the refrigerants and causes other problems Therefore gauge manifolds and charge hoses that are used with a previous refrigerant R22 R407C can not be used for products that use new refrigerants Be sure to use dedicated tools and devices Tool compatibility Compatibility Tool HFC HCFC Reasons for change R410A R407C R22 Do not use the same tools for R22 and Gauge manifold x R410A Charge hose Thread specification differs for R410A R407C Charging cylinder x Weighting instrument used for HFCs Gas detector x The same tool can be used for HFCs Vacuum pump To use existing pump for HFCs pump with reverse flow vacuum pump adaptor must be preventive function installed Weighting instrument Seal material is different between R22 and HFCs Charge mouthpiece Thread specification is different between R410A and others Flaring tool Clu
187. emand 1 level setting 70 of rated power consumption has been set at factory During continuous demand operation when the external demand instruction is received repeatedly the instruction with level has the precedence V3083 96 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation Detailed Setting Procedure of Low Noise Operation and Demand Control Setting mode 1 H1P off In setting mode 2 push the BS1 MODE button one time Setting mode 2 is entered and H1P lights During the setting mode 1 is displayed In low noise operation and In demand control are displayed Setting mode 2 H1P on In setting 1 push and hold the BS1 MODE button for more than 5 seconds Setting mode 2 is entered and H1P lights Push the BS2 SET button several times and match the LED display with the Setting No you want Push the BS3 RETURN button one time and the present setting content is displayed Push the BS2 SET button several times and match the LED display with the setting content as shown below you want Push the BS3 RETURN button two times Returns to Push the BS1 MODE button one time Returns to the setting mode 1 and turns H1P off General Information 97 Test Operation Si39 303 Setting Setting Setting No indication Setting No indication Setting
188. er exceeded in view of the danger of liquid hammer Charging with an unsuitable substance may cause explosions and accidents so always ensure that the appropriate refrigerant R410A is charged Refrigerant containers shall be opened slowly Always use protective gloves and protect your eyes when charging refrigerant To avoid compressor breakdown Do not charge the refrigerant more than the specified amount to raise the condensing pressure W This outdoor unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging of refrigerant W Charge the refrigerant to the liquid pipe in its liquid state Since R410A is a mixed refrigerant its composition changes if charged in a state of gas and normal system operation would no longer be assured m Before filling check whether the tank has a siphon attached or not How to fill a tank with a siphon attached Fill with the tank upright a There is a siphon tube inside so there is no need to turn the tank upside down Other ways of filling the tank Fill with the tank upside down y m Determine the amount of refrigerant to be added by referring to the table write it down on the included Added Refrigerant plate and attach it to the rear side of the front cover Note refer to the example of connection for the amount to be added m After the vacuum drying is finished charge the additional refrigerant in its liqui
189. er supply terminal board Terminal board for remote controller LS 009 09 Ge c f Power supply wiring PERS Terminal box Drain piping connections Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia The ammonia in the sew age might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger 44 General Information Si39 303 Installation Ceiling Mounted Drain Piping Cassette Corner Rig the drain pipe as shown below and take measures Type FXKQ M against condensation Improperly rigged piping could lead to leaks and eventually wet furniture and belongings 1 Install the drain pipes Keep piping as short as possible and slope it downwards so that air pu may not remaine trapped inside the pipe x The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the lt diameter of the connecting pipe vinyl tube pipe size 25 mm outer 2 dimension 32 mm N Use the attached drain hose and clamp metal Insert the drain hose White N Drain hose_ into the drain Socket up to the white tape Tighten the clamp until the Clamp metal laige ssainopad screw head is less than 4 mm from the hose attached atiached AN Caution Setting the unit at an angle opposite to the drain piping might cause leaks Wrap
190. erant cannot be charged any more Do not fail to fully open the stop valve on the liquid side as soon as disconnecting the refrigerant charging hose The piping may be burst due to the liquid sealing Operation state e Compressor frequency 210Hz Y1S 25 Y3S Solenoid valve Open Outdoor unit fan High pressure control e Indoor unit expansion valve All unit 1024 pulse e Indoor unit fan H tap 4 4 2 5 Setting of Refrigerant Recovery Mode When carrying out the refrigerant collection on site fully open the respective expansion valve of indoor and outdoor units Operation procedure setting mode 2 with units in stop mode set B Refrigerant Recovery Vacuuming mode to ON The respective expansion valve of indoor and outdoor units are fully opened H2P turns to display TEST OPERATION blinks TEST OPERATION and IN CENTRALIZED CONTROL are displayed on the remote controller and the operation is prohibited Collect the refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery unit See the instruction attached to the refrigerant recovery unit for more detal G Press Mode button BS1 once and reset Setting Mode 2 100 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 2 6 Setting of Vacuuming Mode In order to perform vacuuming operation at site fully open the expansion valves of indoor and outdoor units to turn on some solenoid valves Operating procedure With Setting Mode 2 whi
191. ernal control adapter on either the outdoor outdoor indoor outdoor or transmission line Set outdoor unit PC board DS1 1 to Indoor factory set n setting mode 1 set the outdoor unit you want to give cool heat selection permission to as the group master and set the other outdoor units as group slave units Setthe outdoor unit external control adapter SS1 to Unified factory set or Cool and SS2 to No factory set Adapter for outside control of outdoor units H H C H SELECT BE B C H SELECT x z els E MASTER SLAVE 2 gt IND MASTER SLAVE i o es essor LH3P 4P 8 _ SELECT C H SELECT 1 daa E E C H SELECT R C TE 2 ADDRESS To indoor unit To indoor unit lt Master unit gt lt Slave unit gt Jj wet oe C HSELECT CHSELECT SELECT a SELECT To indoor unit V3060 Multi outdoor units connection 90 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation i DS2 DSI SETITE Adapter PCB No 0 i DS2 081 ETIC Adapter PCB No 2 Set Cool Heat for More Than One Outdoor Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified Master Outdoor Unit by Cool Heat Switching Remote Controller Add and change the following
192. es and Good Examples in Installation 7 12 1 Example 1 Signal interference due to use of multiple core cable all model Situation Source of Problem and Although for the purposes of group control there are only 2 units per group there are transmission malfunctions between the indoor units and the remote controller and the remote controller s address display is showing non existent addresses such as 13 or 15 Multiple core cable has been used for at least part of the interconnecting wiring between the remote controller and the indoor units Remedial Action This has resulted in signal interference leading to a transmission malfunction Main Points To the outside Indoor unit Indoor unit To the outside Relay box 0000 0001 Wi Indoor unit To the outside Indoor unit To the outside T 0000 0001 Multiple core cable 1F Z Remote Remote controller controller 2 Relay box V1096 The multiple core cable was replaced by twin core cable and the fault disappeared W Although twin core cable had been run from each unit multiple core cable was used on the way m schools etc because remote controllers are often installed a single first floor control room it is easier to use a multi core cable W Signal interference can result in non existent addresses appearing on the display 144 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 12 2 Example 2 Mismatch between cables co
193. f Refrigerant Ceiling Suspended Type FXHQ M Operational steps 36 Drain POSE ettet e tme 50 Refrigerant Charging Instructions 36 drainage rt tte de Reime d 51 Siphon TUBOS cde et 36 Rig drain piping e 50 Additional refrigerant 178 Centralized Control Group No Setting Additional refrigerant charge procedure 179 Type tei tute 75 Additional refrigerant charge total flow 99 BRC7C 75 Address setting for and 92 Group No Setting 76 Adjusting the Air Flow Direction 210 Charge hose for R410A 229 After connection 124 Charge mouthpiece sse 230 Air Tight Test Charging cylinder 229 Checking for Leakerun iso cote 30 CHECK OPERATION FUNCTION 101 Compensating adjustment value 29 Check points 11 Operational steps 29 Check work prior to turn power supply on 62 Allowable Piping 110 Choice of Materials for Refrigerant Piping
194. f a white tape of the hose inserted tip Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the hose Wrap the attached sealing pad 10 over the clamp and drain hose to insulate m Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water leak age due to dew condensation e Indoor drain pipe e Drain socket Clamp 2 Clamp 2 Large sealing pad 10 x attached attached Drain hose 1 Tape White lt 4mm Fig 20 Fig 21 lt PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING gt Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 550 mm m Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit Ceiling slab 300 1 15m Hanger bracket Adjustable lt 550 k JN VI AL E Drain raising pipe amp Clamp attached 2 Raising section Drain hose attached 1 Fig 22 To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose 1 do not bend or twist when install ing This may cause leakage m f converging multiple drain pipes install according to the procedure shown below Slope downwards at a gradient of at least 1 100 gt 100 mm T joint converging drain pipes Fig 23 Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of
195. ferential C 9 11deg when cooling S _ Discharge air temperature Thermometer 2 3 5deg when heating G Compressor discharge pressure Pressure gauge MPa Compressor suction pressure Pressure gauge MPa INV U A V A W A Compressor operating current Clamp meter ee ehe STD1 R JA S JA T JA STD2 R JA S T Compressor operating frequency Clamp meter INV Hz Suction pipe temperature Thermometer 3 15 C INV 5 01 STD2 C Discharge pipe temperature Thermometer 85 105 C INV 5 01 5 0 2 C Clank case heater Touch Warm INV G NG 5 01 G NG STD2 G NG Main power supply voltage Tester Rated voltage 10 R S V R S V RS V Operation circuit voltage Tester Rated voltage 10 V Fan rotation direction Visual inspection Forward rotation G NG Fan noise vibration Listening No noise or vibration Fan operation current Clamp meter BED HEE A A A co Suction air temperature Thermometer Temperature differential C 9 11deg when cooling S Discharge air temperature Thermometer 2 3 5deg when heating G Compressor discharge pressure Pressure gauge MPa Compressor suction pressure Pressure gauge MPa INV U JA V A W A Compressor operating current Clamp meter Prase oeronual STD1 R JA S T JA STD2 R JA S T JA Compressor operating frequency Clamp meter INV Hz Suction pipe temperature Thermometer 3 15 C INV 5 01 5 0 2 C Disc
196. ff freely by remote controller during set time Individual Used when you want to turn on off by both central remote controller and remote controller Timer operation possible by remote controller Used when you want to turn on off by remote controller during set time and you do not want to start operation by central remote controller when time of system start is programmed General Information 77 Test Operation Si39 303 How to Select Operation Mode Whether operation by remote controller will be possible or not for turning on off controlling temperature or setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on the right edge of the table below Example ON by remote OFF by remote controller controller OFF by T 2 iin Unified ON by Unified OFF by remote mode is 1 central remote central remote controller remote controller remote controller controller controller l Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance VLO69 Control mode Control by remote controller Control mode Operation OFF Temperature Operation Unified operation Unified OFF control mode setting individual operation individual stop by by central remote central remote controller or controller or timer operation controlled stop by timer ON OFF control Rejectio
197. for servicing 2 Have you taken full account of the possibility of short circuits Both indoor and outdoor units 3 Can the air filters be replaced easily 4 Have you indicated the size and location of the ceiling inspection ports Make sure there no other installations in the area above 5 Have you taken into account the depth of the installation area In case of ceiling built in type 6 Have you specified the position of the indoor unit clearly Have you taken full account of relevant features of the local ventilation humidity and lighting Refrigerant piping 1 Is the piping system correctly connected 2 Are the rise and fall pipes correctly connected 3 Are the lengths and height differences of the pipes within the Example of a contract drawing recommended limits Operational control Are the interconnections between the piping and wiring of the indoor and outdoor units clearly shown 9 400 2 Are the numbers of the local setting switches clearly shown Group No and Unit No 4 3 Are the wiring connections between the remote controller and the centralized and remote controls clearly shown Refer to the notes relating to the preparation of the control wiring system diagrams see next page Are the different types of wires clearly marked Are the any problems with the way the power supply cables and control wiring have been separated or bound together Are the inter floor connecti
198. g and wiring using sealing material locally procured Small animals may enter the machine Installation Manual 165 Unpacking and Placing the Unit Si39 303 Ex passing piping out through the front 1 Plug the areas marked with r When the piping is routed from the front panel 2 Gas side piping 3 Liquid side piping 166 Installation Manual Si39 303 Refrigerant Piping 6 Refrigerant Piping Caution Notes After completing installation be sure to open the valve See 6 6 Additional refrigerant charge for details Operating the unit with the valve shut will break the compressor Use R410A to add refrigerant The R410A refrigerant cylinder has a pink stripe painted around it All field piping must be installed by a licensed refrigeration technician and must comply with relevant local and national regulations Caution to be taken when brazing refrigerant piping Do not use flux when brazing copper to copper refrigerant piping Particularly for the HFC refrigerant piping Therefore use the phosphor copper brazing filter metal BCuP which does not require flux Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems For instance if the chlorine based flux is used it will cause pipe corrosion or in particular if the flux contains fluorine it will damage the refrigerant oil W Use R410A only when adding refrigerant m Installation tools Make sure to use i
199. g is displayed for functions the indoor unit is not equipped with 5 88 may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the normal mode 6 If the setting mode to Equipped heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual operation by linking to indoor unit 70 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 1 5 Applicable Range of Field setting Ceiling mounted cassette type Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Wall Floor Concealed mounted mounted suspended mounted standing Floor Multi Double flow Corner type built in type ducttype type type type standing flow type FXFQ FXCQ FXKQ FXSQ FXMQ FXHQ FXAQ FXLQ FXNQ Filter sign Ultra long life filter sign Remote controller thermostat sensor 9 u 9 9 Set fan speed when thermostat OFF 2 2 2 d Air flow adjustment Ceiling height o ES A Air flow direction Air flow direction adjustment Down flow operation Air flow direction adjustment range 2 m m U Field set fan speed E selection General Information 71 Test Operation Si39 303 4 4 1 6 Detailed Explanation of Setting Modes Filter Sign Setting Ultra Long Life Filter Sign Setting Fan Speed Changeover
200. g to local regulations or standards The following standards may be applicable if local regulations are not available Maximum Concentration Level The maximum charge of refrigerant and the calculation of the maximum concentration of refrigerant is directly related to the humanly occupied space in to which it could leak The unit of measurement of the concentration is kg m the weight in kg of the refrigerant gas in 1m volume of the occupied space Compliance to the local applicable regulations and standards of the maximum allowable concentration level is required In Australia the maximum allowed concentration level of refrigerant to a humanly space is limited to 0 35kg m for RA07C and 0 44kg m for R410A O tdoor nit Direction of refrigerant flow gt n Room where Ind i NY refrigerant leak has negor n 59 occurred Outflow t j of all the refrigerant in system Pay special attention to the place such as a basement etc where refrigerant can stay since refrigerant is heavier than air Procedure for Checking Dangerous Concentration Check the Dangerous concentration in accordance with steps 1 4 below and take whatever action is necessary Calculate the amount of refrigerant kg charged to each system separately Amount of refrigerant Additional charging Total amount of in a single indoor amount refrigerant kg in uni
201. ge 54 Power Supply 1 Choosing a circuit breaker Cabling of Main The power supply work must conform to local regulations In Japan the relevant regulations are the MITI Power Supply ordinance determining technical standards for electrical equipment and the Internal Wining Provisions a The indoor unit circuit breakers m n accordance with the provisions for internal wiring JEAC8001 1986 power may be supplied by means of crossover lines between the indoor units in a single system branch circuit Branch circuit facility Internal wiring provisions Example of 15A branch circuit or 20A circuit breaker 305 2 branch circuit The motors must be set up with a dedicated branch circuit for each unit However where they correspond to any of the following situations this limitation does not apply When used in a 15A branch circuit of a 20A circuit breaker branch circuit Note It is recommended that the total rated capacity of the motors set up in a 15A branch circuit or a 20A circuit breaker branch circuit should be no more than 2 2kW Branch two way switch Branch overcurrent circuit breaker Rated current 15A or less In case of circuit breaker 20A or less Manual switch Manual switch V1038 When using high static pressure indoor units the fan motors must have a large capacity Single phase 220 240V branch circuits are therefore required for each indoor unit Example Up to 10 x 2 5HP indoor un
202. gerant oil Ester or ether oil on the Be fareful not to let particles enter the pipe inside and outside of the flared section Do not Point the pipe end downward during cutting apply SUNISO oil Be careful to keep dust away D ce General Information 25 Remove the burrs using a file Be careful not to let particles enter the pipe Point the pipe end downward during filing V1352 Installation Si39 303 9 Tighten the flare nut Check for gas leaks Use a torque wrench to apply the proper Check at the threaded section of the flare nut for tightening force gas leaks Spray type gas leak detecting products are available on the market Soap water may be used to check for leaks but use only neutral soap to prevent corrosion of the flare nut Be sure to wipe the nut area clean after the gas leak check Tighten the flare nut with proper torque Tt takes a lot of experience to tighten the flare nut properly without the use of a torque wrench Causes gas leaks Reduces flare nut wall thickness leaks Damages flare nut 0984 Not You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench you may recommendable follow the installation method mentioned below but in case of emergency After the work is finished make sure to check that is no gas leak When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner there is a point where the t
203. gree of vacuum You cannot accurately measure degree of vacuum with the compound gauge on the gauge manifold A Pirani vacuum gauge is required to measure degree of vacuum accurately Because Pirani gauges are very sensitive and require extreme care when using they are not very suitable for use in the field You should therefore use the Pirani gauge to calibrate the attached vacuum gauge on the gauge manifold and the degree of vacuum of the vacuum pump 4 Calibration method 1 Connect a Pirani vacuum gauge and the gauge manifold vacuum gauge 0 760 mmHg to the vacuum pump at the same time and run the pump for about 3 minutes 2 Make sure the reading of the Pirani vacuum gauge is 5 Torr 667 Pa or less The reading of conventional vacuum pumps lowers to about 0 2 Torr If the reading is not 5 Torr or less check the vacuum pump oil Cil is low in many cases Check the attached gauge on the gauge manifold Adjust the gauge if the reading is not exactly correct Adjust the gauge manifold valve so that the Pirani vacuum gauge reads 5 Torr Mark the position indicated by the gauge manifold gauge with an oil based ink pen Use the mark of the gauge manifold as a target when vacuuming in the field oar Gauge manifold Pirani vacuum gauge Indicator Vacuum pump V0993 Reference Types of vacuum pump with respective maximum degree of vacuum 1 Maximum Degree of Vacuum Use e m Expulsion Capa
204. h 9 Tc setting o o e O Normal factory setting oeeoeoo Low OK A AAE EO Quick defrost 10 Defrost setting o o Q o Q Normal factory setting OR E E X SOL x Slow defrost 11 Sequential operation O OK E E E E JO External low noise demand OR A E EE LOR External low noise 12 i O demand setting External low noise demand oeeeoeoeoe YES Address 0 O e o o 0o O0 O gt Binary number 1 13 Airnet address Q e o Q Q e O Ol A EEE Fe 6 digits High static pressure setting High static pressure OFF 09200008 18 setting High static pressure setting OK E E E JOR Emergency OFF O e oe o 0 0 O operation EROR 19 STD compressor is Q o Q o e Q O STD 1 2 operation Inhibited OR A E E X SO inhibited to STD 2 operation Inhibited oeeeeoce Additional refrigerant Refrigerant charging OFF OK EEEE JOR 20 operation settin O e e p 9 Refrigerant charging ON 0900000 Refrigerant recovery Refrigerant recovery OFF OK EEEE JOR mode settin 9 Refrigerant recovery ON 0900000 OFF O e e oe 0 25 Night time iow noise O e O e O Level 1 outdoor fan with 8 step or lower Oeooo000 setting Level 2 outdoor fan with 7 step or lower Level 3 outdoor fan with 6 step or lower E E E HORO Level 1 outdoo
205. harge pipe temperature Thermometer 85 105 C INV 5 01 5 0 2 C Clank case heater Touch Warm NV G NG STD1 G NG STD2 G NG V1093 132 General Information Si39 303 Appendix During operation System name Inspection item Inspection method Standard guideline Measurement values Decision Room 1 V Room 2 V Room 3 V Room 4 V Room 5 V Room 6 V Room 7 V Room 8 V Room 9 V Room10 V Room11 V Room12 V Room13 V Room14 V Room15 V Room16 V Room17 V Room18 V Room19 V Room20 V ee ie Tester 21 V 22 V Room23 V Room24 V Room25 V Room26 V Room27 V Room28 V Room29 V Room30 V Room31 V Room32 V Room33 V Room34 V Room35 V Room36 V Room37 V Room38 V Room39 V Room40 V Room 1 C Room 2 Room 3 Room 4 C Room 5 C Room 6 C Room 7 C Room 8 C Room 9 C Room10 C Room11 C Room12 C Room13 Room14 15 Room16 C Suction air Room17 C Room18 C Room19 C Room20 C temperature Room21 C Room22 C Room23 C Room24 C Room25 C Room26 C Room27 C Room28 C Thermometer Room29 C Room30 C Room31 C Room32 C differential Room33 c Room34 C Room
206. he adaptor for sequential start refer to chapter Examples m For connection wiring to outdoor outdoor transmission F1 F2 outdoor indoor transmission F1 F2 outdoor multi transmission Q1 Q2 refer to chapter Examples m For connection wiring to the central remote controller refer to the installation manual of the central remote controller m Use insulated wire for the power cord 180 Installation Manual Si39 303 Field Wiring 7 2 Power Circuit and Cable Requirements A power circuit See table below must be provided for connection of the unit This circuit must be protected with the required safety devices i e a main switch a slow blow fuse on each phase and an earth leak detector Phase and Voltage Recommended Transmission frequency fuses line selection RXYQ5MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 20A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ8MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 30A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ10MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 30A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ12MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 30A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ14MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 40A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ16MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 40A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ18MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 50A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ20MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 50A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ22MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 50A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ24MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 60A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ26MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 60A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ28MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 70A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ30MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 70A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ32MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 70A 0 75 1 25mm RXYQ34MY1B 3 50Hz 380 415V 90A 0 75 1 25mm RX
207. he table in li 1 1 1 1 1 1 perform the configuration on the parent 1 1 6 6 Additional Refrigerant Charge Caution Do not leave any shutoff valve closed Otherwise the compressor will fail 5 Perform the check operation following the instructions printed on the Service Precaution label The system operates for about 15 minutes 30 minutes at maximum and automatically stops the test operation The system can start a normal operation about 15 minutes after the test operation only if the remote controller displays no error codes lt Cautions for check operation gt 1 Electric box lid 2 Service lid 3 Service precautions Label location m Ifthe system is started within about 12 minutes after the outdoor indoor units are turned ON the compressor will not run and H2P lights up Before starting an operation always verify that the LED display shows the contents of the table in 8 2 Test run 2 The system may require up to 10 minutes until it can start the compressor after an operation start This is a normal operation to equalize the refrigerant distribution W The check operation does not provide any means of checking the indoor units individually For that purpose perform normal operation using the remote controller after the check operation 192 Installation Manual Si39 303 Before Operation N Caution Cautions for no
208. here local conditions warrant such a change 14 General Information Si39 303 Installation 3 2 Work Involved in Individual Operations and Points to be Borne in Mind 3 2 1 Sleeve and Insert Work Operational steps Preliminary talks with construction company mmm Determine position size and number of units required Carry out work Check work V0957 Positioning ofthe Pipe Holes The through holes for the drain piping should be positioned such that the pipes have a downward gradient The gradient must be at least 1 100 The thickness of the insulating materials must also be taken into consideration b The diameter of the through holes for the refrigerant piping should include an allowance for the thickness of the heat insulation materials It is a good idea to think of the liquid and gas pipes as pairs Attention should be paid to the construction of the beam themselves since there are sometimes parts of the beam which cannot be used to accommodate through holes Example Through holes in a reinforced concrete beam Part of beam at least 150mm which must not be pierced Pillar Ri amp 0 3 0958 a An insert is metal tool which is inserted into a floor or a beam before the concrete is set such that fittings such as ducts pipes or suspension bolts for hanging units can be fitted into place later The posi
209. ich can evacuate to 100 7kPa 5Torr 755mmHg 1 Evacuate the system from the liquid and gas pipes by using a vacuum pump for more than 2 hours and bring the system to 100 7kPa After keeping the system under that condition for more than 1 hour check if the vacuum gauge rises or not If it rises the system may either contain moisture inside or have leaks 2 Following should be executed if there is a possibility of moisture remaining inside the pipe if piping work is carried out during the raining season or over a long period of time rainwater may enter the pipe during work After evacuating the system for 2 hours pressurize the system to 0 05MPa vacuum break with nitrogen gas and evacuate the system again using the vacuum pump for 1 hour to 100 7kPa vacuum drying If the system cannot be evacuated to 100 7kPa within 2 hours repeat the operation of vacuum break and vacuum drying Then after leaving the system in vacuum for 1 hour confirm that the vacuum gauge does not rise Make sure to perform airtightness test and vacuum drying using the service ports of the shutoff valve shown in the table on the bellow One outdoor unit installed In case of Liquid line shutoff valve RXYQ5 16MY1B Gas line shutoff valve When multiple outdoor units installed Liquid line shutoff valve Gas line shutoff valve In case of HXYQ18 48MY1B Oil equalizing line shutoff valve Shutoff valve operation procedure
210. ield settings set to Setting mode 1 V3056 62 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 1 3 Check Operation During check operation mount front panel to avoid the misjudging Check operation is mandatory for normal unit operation When the check operation is not executed alarm code U3 will be displayed Press and hold the TEST OPERATION button BS4 on outdoor unit PC board for 5 seconds Check on operation O The test operation is started automatically The following judgements are conducted within 15 minutes Check for wrong wiring Check refrigerant for over charge Check stop valve for not open Pipe length automatic judgement The following indications are conducted while in test operation LED lamp on outdoor unit PC board flickers test operation e Remote controller Indicates On Centralized Control on upper right Indicates Test Operation on lower left V3057 On completion of test operation LED on outdoor unit PC board displays the following H3P ON Normal completion and ON Abnormal completion 5 Check the indoor unit remote controller for abnormal display and correct it In the case of multi outdoor unit system make setting on the master unit PC board Setting with the slave unit is disabled LED display in the case of multi outdoor unit system Same as that in emergency operation Discrim
211. ightening torque suddenly increases From that position further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below Pipe size Further tightening angle Recommended arm length of tool 6 4 1 4 60 to 90 degrees Approx 150mm 9 5 3 8 60 to 90 degrees Approx 200mm 12 7 1 2 30 to 60 degrees Approx 250mm 15 9 5 8 30 to 60 degrees Approx 300mm 19 1 3 4 20 to 35 degrees Approx 450mm 26 General Information Si39 303 Installation Flange a The flange sheet surface should be clean and undamaged Clean any dirt away with a cloth and check Connection that there has been no damage b Coat the flange sheet surface with refrigeration oil Ester or ether oil and then insert the packing Do not use SUNISO oil Refrigeration oil Ester or ether oil Flange indentation Packing Flange projection V1320 c Tighten the bolts in opposite corners first to ensure that the connection is true Example Order ASC5B5D The bolts should be tightened little by A little in the above order such that the same degree of torque is applied evenly to each corner B V0982 Important points 1 Only clean refrigeration oil should be used to coat the flange i e free from dirt or water 2 The correct amount of torque should be applied when tightening the flange bolts Standard torques for tightening screws and bolts ISO hexagonal bolt Class 5 8 5T 10 9 10T
212. iling mounted cassette type Double flow Ceiling mounted duct type FXCQ20M FXMQ40M FXCQ25M FXMQ50M FXCQ32M i FXMQ63M FXCQ40M FXMQ80M FXCQ50M FXMQ100M FXCQ63M FXMQ125M FXCQ80M FXMQ200M FXCQ125M FXMQ250M Ceiling mounted cassette type Ceiling suspended type Multi flow 600x600 FXHQ32M FXZQ20M 2 FXHQ63M FXZQ25M FXHQ100M FXZQ32M FXZQ40M FXZQ50M Ceiling mounted cassette type Multi flow Wall mounted type FXFQ25M FXAQ20M FXFQ32M FXAQ25M FXFQ40M FXAQ32M FXFQ50M Y FXAQ40M FXFQ63M FXAQ50M FXFQ80M FXAQ63M FXFQ100M FXFQ125M Ceiling mounted cassette corner type Floor standing type FXKQ25M FXLQ20M FXKQ32M FXLQ25M FXKQ40M FXLQ32M FXKQ63M FXLQ40M FXLQ50M FXLQ63M Ceiling mounted built in type FXSQ20M FXSQ25M Concealed floor standing type FXNQ20M D FXNQ25M FXSQ32M FXNQ32M FXSQ40M FXNQ40M FXSQ50M FXNQ50M FXSQ63M FXNQ63M FXSQ80M FXSQ100M FXSQ125M General Information 3 Product Outline Si39 303 1 2 2 Outdoor Units RXYQ5M RXYQ8M 10M RXYQ12M 14M 16M RXYQ18M 20M M rr md ir im IP I ica 1 1 1 pem D Wea 1 P n y 1 Wg E i ig ta 1 1 tal n Wa x ma 1 m A e T f 5HP 8 10HP 12 14 16HP 18 20HP RXYQ22M 24M 26M RXYQ28M 30M 32M mn E q 1 1
213. inate the operating status of the master unit slave units through the following LED display Master LED display O ON OFF Blink H1P H7P H8P 0070000 o Slave 1 0 000000 o Slave 2 0000000 Malfunction code Factory set In case of an alarm code displayed on remote controller Cause of trouble due to faulty Alarm Countermeasure installation work code Closed stop valve of outdoor unit E3 In case of RXYQ5 to 16M Single outdoor installation E4 Liquid side stop valve Open F3 Gas side stop valve Open UF Oil equalizing pipe stop valve Close In case of RXYQ18 to 48M Multi outdoor installation Liquid side stop valve Open Gas side stop valve Open Oil equalizing pipe stop valve Open Reversed phase in power cable U1 Change connection of two wires among three for correct phasing connection for outdoor unit Electric power for outdoor or indoor unit U4 Check that the power cable for outdoor unit is connected properly is not supplied Including open phase Incorrect wiring between units UF Check that the wiring between units corresponds correctly to refrigerant piping system Refrigerant overcharge E3 Compute again optimum amount of refrigerant to be added based on F6 the piping length then collect the excessive amount by using UF refrigerant collector to make the refrigerant amount proper Insufficient refrigerant E4 Check that additional charging has been carried out F3
214. ing an electric shock or fire Do not place the controller exposed to direct sunlight The LCD display may get discolored failing to display the data Do not wipe the controller operation panel with benzine thinner chemical dust cloth etc The panel may get discolored or the coating peeled off If it is heavily dirty soak a cloth in water diluted neutral detergent squeeze it well and wipe the panel clean And wipe it with another dry cloth Never touch the internal parts of the controller Do not remove the front panel Some parts inside are dangerous to touch and a machine trouble may happen For checking and adjusting the internal parts contact your dealer Avoid placing the controller in a spot splashed with water Water coming inside the machine may cause an electric leak or may damage the internal electronic parts 200 Operation Manual Si39 303 Safety Cautions m Never press the button of the remote controller with a hard pointed object The remote controller may be damaged m Never pull or twist the electric wire of a remote controller It may cause the unit to malfunction m Do not operate the air conditioner when using a room fumigation type insecticide Failure to observe could cause the chemicals to become deposited in the unit which could endanger the health of those who are hypersensitive to chemicals Operation Manual 201 What to Do Before Operation Si39 303 2 What to Do Before Operation
215. ing operation System name Inspection item Inspection method Standard guideline Measurement values Decision Main power supply voltage Tester Rated voltage 10 R S V S T VIRT V Operation circuit voltage Tester Rated voltage 10 V Fan rotation direction Visual inspection Forward rotation G NG Fan noise vibration Listening No noise or vibration Fan operation current Clamp meter WHITE A A A Suction airtemperature Thermometer Temperature differential C 9 11deg when cooling S Discharge air temperature Thermometer 2 3 5deg when heating G Compressor discharge pressure Pressure gauge MPa E Compressor suction pressure Pressure gauge MPa INV U JA V A W A Compressor operating current Clamp meter STD1 R JA S T JA STD2 R JA S T JA Compressor operating frequency Clamp meter INV Hz Suction pipe temperature Thermometer 3 15 C INV 5 01 C STD2 C Discharge pipe temperature Thermometer 85 105 C INV 5 01 5 0 2 C Clank case heater Touch Warm INV 5 01 G NG STD2 G NG Main power supply voltage Tester Rated voltage 10 R S V R S V R S V Operation circuit voltage Tester Rated voltage 10 V Fan rotation direction Visual inspection Forward rotation G NG Fan noise vibration Listening No noise or vibration Fan operation current Clamp meter MED WHITE BLACK A A A Suction air temperature Thermometer Temperature dif
216. ion piping kits When the piping length between the multi connection kits or between multi connection kit and outdoor unit is 2m or more prepare a vertical projection part 200mm or more as shown below only on the gas pipe line location less than 2m from multi connection kit In the case of 2m or less Less than 2m V3037 In the case of 2m or more Vertical Projection Less than 2m 2m or more 4 Vertical Vertical Projection Projection 200 300 200 300mm lt F Less than 2m Less than 2m V3085 108 General Information Si39 303 Appendix lt The Example of A Wrong Pattern gt Wrong Oil is collected to the outdoor unit at the time of a stop because of bottom omission of piping H mmm r V3039 Wrong Oil is collected to the low level outdoor unit at the time of a stop because of downward slope of piping The example of installation on which oil is not collected Good Good Vertical projector is required if this distance is 2m or more Vertical Projection V3086 Outdoor Unit Multi Connection Piping Kit Actual piping length 10m or less equivalent length 13m or less Actual piping length 150m or less equivalent length 175m or less the total extension 300m or less Max allowable Piping Length Multi Connection Piping Kit Indoor Unit REFNET Joint Indoor Unit Actual
217. it Indoor nit co Opening between rooms Partition Where there is an opening without a door or where there are openings above and below the door which are each equivalent in size to 0 15 or more of the floor area c Where there is a gas leak detection alarm device linked to a mechanical ventilator in the smallest room then the next smallest room will become the measurement target tdoor nit OQ s Smallest Second Indoor nit room smallest room Calculate the refrigerant density using the results of the calculations in Step 1 and 2 above Total volume of refrigerant in the refrigerant system Size of the smallest room in which there is an indoor unit installed lt Dangerous concentration kg m in the case of R407C 0 35kg m R410A 0 44kg m If the result of the above calculation exceeds the dangerous concentration level then make similar calculations for the second then third smallest room and so on until the result falls short of the concentration level General Information 103 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Si39 303 Step 4 Dealing with situations where the result exceeds the dangerous concentration level Where the installation of a facility results in a concentration in excess of the dangerous concentration level then it may be necessary t
218. items to x Install cool heat switching remote controller on the group master outdoor unit Set SS1 on the group master outdoor unit PC board Supplementation on and When switching cool heat for each adapter PC board with the use of more than one adapter PC board set the address of the adapter PC board DS1 and DS2 so that it matches the unified cool heat address of outdoor unit PC board Outdoor unit group master No 1 slave No 1 Outdoor Outdoor unit group unit group Outdoor i i Adapter PCB unit group Nod master No 0 slave No 0 slave No 0 C H group address 0900000 i i DS2 DS i Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor I Outdoor Outdoor unit group unit group unit group Adapter PCB unit group unit group master No 2 slave No 2 slave No 2 i No 3 master No 3 slave No 3 V2723 General Information 91 Test Operation Si39 303 Address setting for and Set lower 5 digits with binary number No 0 to No 31 Address Outdoor unit PCB LED Adapter PCB No Set with setting mode 2 DS2 DS1 No 0 oe e0000 i 0 No 1 oe 1 No 2 oe 2 No oe 0000 202 3 No 4 oe e 4 No 30 oe ooooe 30 LJ LJ No 31 oe 31
219. its or 5 x 5HP indoor units can be wired together b The outdoor unit circuit breaker W Aseparate circuit breaker must be fitted for each unit W The motors incorporated into air conditioning system compressors are treated as special motors under the internal wiring provisions The values which apply to normal motors are thus somewhat variance with those which apply to such compressor motors You are recommended to adhere strictly to the procedures laid down in the technical materials included in for example the system design manuals Calculation of load Refer to local regulation With respect to the calculation of load for motors with special applications such as elevator air conditioner and refrigerator motors not only must the rated current be shown on the name plate of the said motor or piece of apparatus but it must also included all special characteristics or applications General Information 53 Installation Si39 303 Notes The rated current for package air conditioners which use special purpose built in compressor motors in their compressors in 1 2 times the operating current shown on the name plate 2 Cable size The thickness of the cables in the circuits branch circuits providing the main power supply to each item of apparatus must satisfy the following conditions 1 To have a current tolerance of 40 or more of the rated current of the overcurrent circuit breaker wiring circuit breaker
220. itself is nontoxic nonflammable and is safe If the refrigerant should leak however its concentration may exceed the allowable limit depending on room size Due to this it could be necessary to take measures against leakage Refer to the chapter Caution for refrigerant leaks Do not install in the following locations e Locations such as kitchens which contain a lot of mineral oil or steam in the atmosphere or where oil may splatter on the unit Resin parts may deteriorate causing the unit to fall or leak 162 Installation Manual Si39 303 Selection of Location e Locations where sulfurous acids and other corrosive gases may be present in the atmosphere Copper piping and soldered joints may corrode causing refrigerant to leak e Locations where equipment that produces electromagnetic waves is found The electromagnetic waves may cause the control system to malfunction preventing normal operation e Locations where flammable gases may leak where thinner gasoline and other volatile substances are handled or where carbon dust and other incendiary substances are found in the atmosphere Leaked gas may accumulate around the unit causing an explosion Installation Manual 163 Inspecting and Handling the Unit Si39 303 4 Inspecting and Handling the Unit At delivery the package should be checked and any damage should be reported immediately to the carrier claims agent When handling the unit take into acco
221. izing line shutoff valve Open Open Open N Caution If the refrigerant cylinder is siphonal set it upright while charging additional refrigerant Installation Manual 179 Field Wiring Si39 303 7 Field Wiring 7 1 Caution All field wiring and components must be installed by a licensed electrician and must comply with relevant local and national regulations The field wiring must be carried out in accordance with the wiring diagrams and the instructions given below Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit Never use a power supply shared by another appliance This product s reversed phase protection detector only works when the product started up The reversed phase protection detector is designed to stop the product in the event of an abnormalities when the product is started up Replace two of the three phases L1 L2 and L3 during reverse phase protection circuit operation Reversed phase detection is not performed while the product is operating If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after an momentary black out and the power goes on and off while the product is operating attach a reversed phase protection circuit locally Running the product in reversed phase can break the compressor and other parts Optional Parts Cool Heat Selector Notes S19 dns Selector switch fan cool heat S28 Selector switch cool heat W Use copper conductors only m When using t
222. ke measures against condensation Improperly rigged piping could Suspended Type lead to leaks and eventually wet furniture and belongings FXHQ M 1 Rig drain piping m For drain work rig the pipes so that they drain reliably The drain pipe outlet direction can be chosen from the right rear right left rear and left Refer to REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK for right rear and right direction and refer to Fig 20 for left rear and left direction Rear side metal plate Rear left facing drain piping removable part 7 Left dressing board a removable part Left facing drain piping Fig 20 m For left drain pipe outlet remove the rubber plug and the insulation on the drain pipe connecting opening on the left side of the unit and change the position to the right side 01417 5 1 Insert the rubber stopper securely all the way to the base order to prevent water leakage m The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the diameter of the connecting pipe Vinyl tube pipe size 20 mm outer dimension 26 mm Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1 100 to prevent air pockets from forming Refer to Fig 21 Use the attached drain hose 1 and clamp 2 Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the gray tape Refer to Fig 22 Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the hose Refer to Fig 23 Be careful of the installa
223. keeping it within a 30 angle when installed horizontally m Install the REFNET header so that it branches horizontally m Do not used a T joint for the branch pipe n Note 128 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 9 VRV Inspection Sheet Inspection date Delivery date Transfer date Owner System name Outdoor units Installation location Model Unit No Outdoor unit system name Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2 Outdoor unit 3 Indoor units No Installation Model Unit No Group No No Installation Model Unit No Group No 1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40 Field settings C H SELECT setting mode 1 C H SELECT setting DS1 1 Low noise operation Sequential start IND MASTER SLAVE ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Tc Te Defrost SETTING Refrigerant addition replenishment H M L H M L H M L kg Company name Inspector V1091 General Information 129 Appendix Si39 303 Before turning on the power 9 P System name Inspection item Inspection method Standard
224. l Construction Work Comprehensive Flow Chart Construction Air conditioning work work Determination of division of work Settling operational details Settling sleeve and insert work details Fitting of steel sleeves Molding box and 4 reinforcement work Sleeve and insert work TT Installation of indoor unit Removal of molding boxes I Refrigerant piping work 7 Drain pipe work a Le Duct work Heat insulation work B 7 0 Electrical work i Preparation of contract drawings Ceiling preparations L Building rooftop cinder cone Outdoor unit foundation work eas s Installation of outdoor unit T Air tight test 1 Vacuum drying Additional charge of refrigerant Fit decoration panels l Test run Cleaning inside and outside Energization Transfer to customer with explanation V0952 il Note 1 The division of the work should be thoroughly clarified This applies particularly to work relating to the connection of control wiring fitting of remote controller and central control panel boundary work on areas such as connection of drain piping and humidification supply piping inspection and foundation 2 Keep a constant check on the progress of the construction work to avoid devia
225. l cooling capacities ranging from 14 0 to 133 5kW and nominal heating capacities ranging from 16 0 to 150 0kW The RXYQ M units can be combined with Daikin VRV series indoor units for air conditioning purposes The present installation manual describes the procedures for unpacking installing and connecting the RXYQ M units Installation of the indoor units is not described in this manual Always refer to the installation manual supplied with these units for their installation 1 1 Combination The indoor units can be installed in the following range m Always use appropriate indoor units compatible with R410A To lean which models of indoor units are compatible with R410A refer to the product catalogs W Total capacity quantity of indoor units Outdoor unit Total capacity of indoor units RXYQ5MY1B 62 5 162 5 RXYQ8MY1B 100 260 RXYQ10MY1B 125 325 RXYQ12MY1B 150 390 RXYQ14MY1B 175 455 RXYQ16MY1B 200 520 RXYQ18MY1B 225 585 RXYQ20MY1B 250 650 RXYQ22MY1B 275 715 RXYQ24MY1B 300 780 RXYQ26MY1B 325 845 RXYQ28MY1B 350 910 RXYQ30MY1B 375 975 RXYQ32MY1B 400 1040 RXYQ34MY1B 425
226. le in accordance with the amount of condensation drained by all units with a common drain pipe Consider 2 l hr of drainage for every 1 HP For example drainage from 3 units running at 2 HP and 2 units running at 3 HP is calculated as follows 2 x 2 HP x 3 units 2 I hr x 3 HP x 2 units 24 l hr Relationship between horizontal pipe diameter and allowable drainage for extended ventilation system i i i Allowable flow rate l hr JIS nominal yny chloride pipe Remarks iameter mm Piping gradient 1 50 Piping gradient 1 100 VP20 20 39 27 Reference value Cannot VP25 25 70 50 be used in grouped piping VP30 31 125 88 VP40 40 247 175 B used in grouped VP50 51 473 334 W Calculations have been made with water area inside the pipe as 10 Allowable flow rate figures below the decimal have been discarded Use VP30 or larger pipe after the convergence point 2 Relationship between riser diameter and allowable drainage for extended ventilation system Vinyl chloride pipe Allowable flow rate JIS nominal diameter mm Remarks VP20 20 220 Reference value Cannot VP25 25 410 be used in grouped piping VP30 31 730 VP40 40 1440 Can be used in grouped VP50 51 2760 piping VP65 67 5710 VP75 77 8280 Allowed flow rate figures below the decimal have been discarded Use VP30 or larger pipe in risers Use the same drain pipe for
227. le the unit stops set B Refrigerant recovery Vacuuming mode to ON The expansion valves of indoor and outdoor units fully open and some of solenoid valves open H2P blinks to indicate the test operation and the remote controller displays Test Operation and In Centralized control thus prohibiting operation After setting do not cancel Setting Mode 2 until completion of Vacuuming operation Q Use the vacuum pump to perform vacuuming operation G Press Mode button BS1 once and reset Setting Mode 2 4 4 2 7 Check Operation To prevent any trouble in the period of installation at site the system is provided with a test operation mode enabling check for incorrect wiring stop valve left in closed coming out or misplacing with suction pipe thermistor of discharge pipe thermistor and judgment of piping length refrigerant overcharging and learning for the minimum opening degree of motorized valve CHECK OPERATION FUNCTION LED display H1P H7P O ON QO BLINKING OFF Unit stopping 000000 Press the TEST button for 5 seconds Step 1 Pressure equalizing eoeeeeo 10 sec to 10 minutes Y Step 2 Cooling start control 900000 20 sec to 2 minutes Step 3 Stability waiting operation eoeeeoo 10 minutes Y Step4 6 i Judgement function e Stop valve close check 009000000 e Wrong wiring check oeeoeo e Refrigerant over change check Piping length check
228. lear understanding of the special features of this system We have paid particular attention to points of difference in installation procedure between this system and the more traditional package and room air conditioning system The manual is designed specifically to cater for those supervising installation work and concentrates on those products which are currently on the market Essential points which need to be taken into consideration when designing an appropriate configuration for the system and in each of the separate installation processes have also been included We have also added a section covering problems which have arisen in connection with installation work undertaken to date in an attempt to prevent the recurrence of the same problems Please be sure to read this manual thoroughly before starting installation work in order to ensure that all such work is carried out with maximum efficiency and to maximum effect The following technical documents are also available from Daikin Please use these documents together with this manual to conduct efficient servicing Service Manual VRVII R410A Heat Pump 50Hz Series Si39 303 April 2003 July 2003 After Sales Service Division Si39 303 37437 System R410A PLUS Series Part 1 General Information f 1 Prod ct QutliNe uuu n 2 1 1 Model Names of Indoor Outdoor 2 1 2
229. lfunctioning of the earth leak detector itself Earth leak detector which are especially for protecting ground faults should be used in conjunction with main switch or fuse for use with wiring This unit has a negative phase protection circuit If it operates only operate the unit after correcting the wiring 182 Installation Manual Si39 303 Field Wiring 7 4 Examples System example Field power supply Main switch Earth leak detector Fuse Cool heat selector Remote controller power supply wiring sheathed cable transmission wiring sheathed cable oU d Field line connection L1 L2 13 N phase of the power cord should be clamped to the safety catch using the included clamp material The green and yellow striped wrapped wires should be used for grounding 0 0 N O O P G FO 12 13 14 15 17 5 TNT 2 18 3 Se M Power supply 200 V Three phase Branch switch overcurrent breaker Grounding wire Earth leakage breaker Section
230. ller unified ON OFF controller and indoor unit before setting the centralized control group number 150 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 12 9 Example 9 88 cannot be cleared from the central remote controller Situation The display on the central remote controller does not change from its initial state after turning power ON Initial display of the central remote controller _ Li u V1105 Cause None of the indoor units connected to the central remote controller have been given a group No 2 The connector for setting the master controller inside the central remote controller is disconnected Remedial Action Set a centralized control group No for each indoor unit with the respective remote controllers m Connect the connector for setting the master controller in one of the central remote controller Main Points m f the setting for master controller has been changed reset the power to the unit at the ON OFF switch or the forced reset switch of the controller W Activate power to the central remote controller unified ON OFF controller and indoor unit before setting the centralized control group No W For details on how to set the centralized control group number refer to the installation manual General Information 151 Appendix Si39 303 152 General Information Si39 303 Part 2 Installation Manual Tc COQUE cose orent nina i os mter h
231. losed then open the nitrogen gas stop valve 7 Valve A and 16 Valve B while adjusting the nitrogen gas pressure regulating valve thus increasing the pressure One outdoor unit installed In case of RXYQ5 16MY1B 1 Pressure reducing valve 2 Nitrogen 3 Refrigerant cylinder 4 Siphon system 5 Measuring instrument 6 Vacuum pump 7 Valve A 8 Gas side 9 Outdoor unit 10 Liquid side 11 Indoor unit 12 Shutoff valve service port 13 Charge hose 14 To indoor unit 15 Oil equalizing line 16 Valve B 17 Dotted lines represent onsite piping When multiple outdoor units installed In case of RXYQ18 48MY1B A Pa m Important points 1 Where the lengths of piping involved are particularly long then the air tight test should be carried out block by block Example 1 Indoor side 2 Indoor side vertical pipes 3 Indoor side vertical pipes outdoor side 30 General Information Si39 303 Installation 3 2 6 Vacuum Drying What is vacuum Vacuum drying is drying The use of a vacuum pump to vaporize gasify the moisture liquid inside the pipes and expel it leaving the pipes completely dry inside At 1 atm 760 mmHg the boiling point evaporating temperature of water is 100 C but if a vacuum is created inside the pipes using a vacuum pump then the boiling point is rapidly reduced as th
232. m H2 H1 SS KK ur dE M Sh 1 2 8 5 5 Indoor units 1 8 3 example in the case of refnet header indoor units 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Outdoor unit Refnet header uS H1 i rs 5 6 Indoor units 1 8 General Information 113 Appendix Si39 303 7 4 2 How to select the refnet header m Choose from the following table in accordance with the total capacity of all the indoor units connected below the REFENT header W Note 250 type cannot be connected below the REFENT header Indoor capacity index Refrigerant branch kit name lt 200 KHRP26M22H Max 4 kit lt 290 KHRP26M33H Max 8 kit 290 lt X lt 640 KHRP26M72H Max 8 kit 640 lt KHRP26M73H Max 8 kit KHRP26M73HP Example of downstream indoor units 1 example in case of refnet joint C indoor units 3 4 5 6 7 8 Outdoor unit REFNET joint C Indoor units 1 8 2 example in case of refnet joint B indoor units 7 8 example in case of refnet header indoor units 1 2 3 4 5 6 Outdoor unit REFNET joint B Hi 3 example in the case of refnet header indoor 1 2 3 4 5
233. m is in cooling operation set by the master remote controller How to designate the master remote controller RXYQ series REYQ series EN BRC1A51 Press the operation mode selector button of the current master remote controller for 4 seconds The display showing changeover under control of all slave remote an controllers connected to the same outdoor unit or BS unit flashes Press the operation mode selector button of the controller that you wish to designate as the master remote controller Then designation is completed This remote controller is designated as the master remote controller and the display showing J changeover under control vanishes The displays of other remote controllers show NA changeover under control 212 Operation Manual Si39 303 Operation Procedure 6 6 Precautions for group control system or two remote controller control system This system provides two other control systems beside individual control one remote controller controls one indoor unit system Confirm the following if your unit is of the following control System type m Group control system One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units All indoor units are equally
234. minute 8 12 The Compressor in the Outdoor Unit does not Stop after a Short Heating Operation m This is to prevent oil and refrigerant from remaining in the compressor The unit will stop after 5 to 10 minutes 8 13 The Inside of an Outdoor Unit is Warm even when the Unit has stopped W This is because the crankcase heater is warming the compressor so that the compressor can start smoothly Operation Manual 217 Troubleshooting Si39 303 9 Troubleshooting If one of the following malfunctions occur take the measures shown below and contact your Daikin dealer The system must be repaired by a qualified service person m lfasafety device such as a fuse a breaker or an earth leakage breaker frequently actuates or the ON OFF switch does not properly work Measure Turn off the main power switch m f water leaks from unit Measure Stop the operation m Ifthe display xs test the unit number and the operation lamp flash and the malfunction code appears RXYQ series REYQ series my 9 arconom ner o om 1 Inspection display 2 Indoor unit number in which a malfunction occurs 3 Operation lamp 4 Malfunction code Measure Notify your Daikin deale
235. n G lt amp 68 D 489 09 1 button VDAIKIN Press the button and the system will start Press the button again and the system will stop 2 Operation lamp red The lamp lights up during operation 3 Display changeover under control It is impossible to changeover heat cool with the remote controller when this icon is displayed 4 Display p air flow Refer to the chapter Operation procedure Adjusting the air flow direction Operation Manual 203 Remote Controller and Changeover Switch Name and Function of Each Switch and Display Si39 303 Notes 5 Display amp ceoPrioN ventilation air cleaning This display shows that the total heat exchange and the air cleaning unit are in operation These are optional accessories 6 Display set temperature This display shows the temperature you have set Display qq 3 is operation mode This display shows the current operation mode 8 Display 3 programmed time This display shows the programmed time of the system start or stop 9 Display x
236. n S alarm device 4 mechanical ventilator nL n Notes This precaution shows the requirement of EN Action 1 Make openings sufficiently large to permit free flow of air The precaution should be followed in accordance of local code 196 Installation Manual Si39 303 Part 3 Operation Manual EM E 199 2 What to Do Before Operation 202 3 Remote Controller and Changeover Switch Name and Function of Each Switch and Display 203 4 Sead RR HUN 205 AA Never Do the Following ne etie 205 5p Operation Range uec cepe eee eoe beider itera in a on a RU uM HIR 206 6 Operation PrOCOOUEG L u u u vos Puta seme popu ep ooa quie qu 207 6 1 Cooling Heating and Fan Only Operation 207 6 2 Program Dry Operation a 209 6 3 Adjusting the Air Flow Direction Only for Double flow Multi flow Corner Ceiling suspended and Wall mounted 210 6 4 Programming Start and Stop of the System with Timer 211 6 5 Setting the Master Remote Controller 212 6 6 Precautions for group control system or two remote controller control
237. n Example Rejection Example Rejection Rejection Acceptance 0 impossible by Example em remote controller Rejection 10 1 Example Example Rejection 11 OFF control only Acceptance Rejection Acceptance 2 possible by enm remote controller Rejection 12 3 Rejection 13 Centralized Acceptance Rejection Acceptance 4 Rejection 14 Acceptance Acceptance 5 Rejection 15 Individual Acceptance Rejection Acceptance 6 Rejection 16 Acceptance Acceptance Rejection 17 Timer operation Acceptance Acceptance Rejection Acceptance 8 possible by During timer at ON During timer at ON Rejection 18 remote controller position only position only Acceptance Acceptance 9 Rejection 19 Do not select timer operation possible by remote controller if not using a remote controller Operation by timer is impossible in this case 1 Factory setting When the operation stop temperature setting and operation mode setting by remote controller are rejected displayed on the remote controller VLO70 78 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation 4 4 2 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit 4 4 2 1 Field Setting from Outdoor Unit W Setting by dip switches The following field settings are made by dip switches on PC board Dipewiien
238. nal Charge of Refrigerant at installation time W Operational steps Use the length of the piping to calculate the amount of nd refrigerant required Additional charge of refrigerant V0995 Important points 1 The results of all calculations must be recorded Make a list 2 The refrigerant will need to be additionally charged whenever the distance between the outdoor unit and the most distant indoor unit is more than 10m 3 The additional charging operation should be carried out by input of liquid from Service port at liquid stop valve following completion of the vacuum drying operation 4 When the additional charging operation cannot be satisfactorily completed use the action of the compressor to complete the additional charging during the test run Refrigerant HFC401A are Quasi azeotropic refrigerants Therefore these refrigerants must be charged in the liquid Charging state When charging the refrigerant into equipment from the refrigerant cylinder turn the refrigerant Instructions cylinder upside down Important Make sure that the refrigerant liquid is taken out from the bottom part of the refrigerant cylinder Do not take out the refrigerant gas at the upper part of the refrigerant cylinder for charging V0997 V0996 Caution Since some refrigerant cylinders differ in the internal mechanism it is necessary to examine the cylinder carefully Some cylinders have a siphon tub
239. ndation bolts should be inserted 20 mm m Make sure the base under the unit extended more than 765mm behind the unit m The height of the base should be at least 150mm from the floor mM 8 m The unit must be installed on a solid longitudinal foundation steel beam frame or concrete as indicated in figure below A 1 B Vie x Bg amp 5 1 Foundation bolt point 15 dia 4 positions 2 Depth of product 3 Shape of indoor unit s support leg and foundation bolt positions Model A B Q5 type 635 497 Q8 10 type 930 792 Q12 14 16 type 1240 1102 Do not use stands to support the corners Do not use stands to support the corners Caution 1 Prepare water drainage channel around the foundation to drain waste water from around the unit 2 If the unit is to be installed on a roof check the strength of the roof and its drainage facilities first 3 If the unit is to be installed on a frame install the waterproofing board within a distance of 150mm under the unit in order to prevent infiltration of water coming from under the unit Precaution m When installing on a roof make sure the roof floor is strong enough and be sure to water proof all work m Make sure the area around the machine drains properly by setting up drainage grooves around the foundation Drain water is sometimes discharged from the outdoor unit when it is running W Block all gaps in the holes for passing out pipin
240. ne Since HFCs do not contain chlorine new tester detects hydrogen Refrigerant oil Air compal Specifications Contains synthetic oil therefore it can be used for piping work of every refrigerant cycle Offers high rust resistance and stability over long period of time Differences Can be used for R410A and R22 units Gauge manifold for R410A Specifications High pressure gauge 0 1 to 5 3 MPa 76 cmHg to 53 kg cm Low pressure gauge 0 1 to 3 8 MPa 76 cmHg to 38 kg cm 1 4 2 5 16 2min 2 5min No oil is used in pressure test of gauges For prevention of contamination 228 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Temperature scale indicates the relationship between pressure and temperature in gas saturated state W Differences e Change in pressure e Change in service port diameter 7 Charge hose for R410A Hose with ball valve m Specifications Working pressure 5 08 MPa 51 8 kg cm Rupture pressure 25 4 MPa 259 kg cm Available with and without hand operate valve that prevents refrigerant from outflow m Differences Pressure proof hose Change in service port diameter Use of nylon coated material for HFC resistance 8 Charging cylinder NI not be used Specifications Use weigher for refrigerant charge listed below to charge directly from refrigerant cylinder
241. ng mineral oils such as SUNISO oil or moisture should be prevented from getting mixed into the system B Tight R410A does not contain any chlorine does not destroy the ozone layer and does not reduce the earth s protection against harmful ultraviolet radiation R410A can contribute slightly to the greenhouse effect if it is released Therefore we should take special attention to check the tightness of the installation Read the chapter Refrigerant piping work carefully and follow these procedures correctly Since design pressure is 3 8MPa or 38bar for R407C units 3 3MPa or 33bar pipes of larger wall thickness may be required Since R410A is a mixed refrigerant the required additional refrigerant must be charged in its liquid state If the refrigerant is charged in a state of gas its composition changes and the system will not work properly The indoor unit is for R410A See the catalog for indoor unit models which can be connected Normal operation is not possible when connected to other units Do not allow children to mount on the outdoor unit or avoid placing any object on it Falling or tumble may result in injury 154 Installation Manual Si39 303 Introduction 1 Introduction This installation manual concerns VRV inverters of the Daikin RXYQ M series These units are designed for outdoor installation and used for cooling and heatpump applications The units are available in 3 standard sizes with nomina
242. ng mounted cassette type FXFQ 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100 125 Multi flow Ceiling mounted __ EE cassolo coinor FXKQ 25M 32M 40M 63M Ceiling mounted VE built in type FXSQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M geing gonted 40M 50M 63M 80M 100M 125M 200M 250M Ceiling suspended type FXHQ 32M 63M 100M mounted ExaQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M eM nos standing FXLQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M Concealed Floor standing type FXNQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 68M s m P Indoor unit capacity New refrigerant model code P20 P25 P32 P40 P50 P63 P80 P100 P125 P200 P250 type type type type type type type type type type type Selecting model capacity 2 2 2 8 3 5 4 5 5 6 7 0 9 0 11 2 14 0 22 4 28 0 kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW Equivalent output O 8HP 1HP 1 25HP 1 6HP 2 0HP 2 5HP 3 2HP 4HP 5HP 8HP 10HP Use the above tables to determine the capacities of indoor units to be connected Make sure the total capacity of indoor units connected to each outdoor unit is within the specified value kW The total capacity of connected indoor units must be within a range of 50 to 130 of the rated capacity of the outdoor unit In some models it is not possible to connect the maximum numbe
243. ning 24 Bucket 3P086156 4A 9 nm Note Use the drain outlet for maintenance to drain water from the drain pan General Information 45 Installation Si39 303 N Caution WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED e Check drainage flow during COOL running explained under TESTOPERATION WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED Remove the electric parts box lid connect a power supply and remote controller to the terminals Refer to the Installation Manuals Next press the inspection test operation button Eaj on the remote controller The unit will engage the test operation mode Press the operation mode selector button 2 until selecting FAN OPERATION 4 Then press the ON OFF button The indoor unit fan and drain pump will start up Check that the water has drained from the unit Press 1 to go back to the first mode QO LIN ENEA T T Power supply 1 220 240V PC board 2 S Y Power supply terminal Copper wire T Electric parts box lid 3P086156 4A 10 Drain piping connections Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger 46 General Information Si39 303 Installation Ceiling Mou
244. nnecting indoor and outdoor units and corresponding piping all model Situation The remote controller is not showing any malfunction and the system is operating but there is no flow of warm air from the indoor unit in heating mode Source of The connecting cables and the corresponding piping were not correctly matched Problem and Recabling was carried out and the fault disappeared Remedial Action pipes cables V1097 Main Points W Special care must be taken when the pipework and cabling are carried out by different people m Run each indoor unit in turn to check that the system is correctly matched General Information 145 Appendix Si39 303 7 12 3 Example 3 Drain pipe trap shape defective Situation Indoor unit was fitted with a drain trap but a leak occurred during subsequent operation Source of The trap was not properly shaped thus preventing it from functioning effectively as a trap and resulting in Problem and drain leakage The trap was reshaped and the fault disappeared Remedial Action Negative pressure Negative pressure H 0mm H 50mm or more H 1 2H Trap ineffective V1098 Main Points m Duct types 40 125 require a drain trap Reason There is resistance on the air inlet side caused by the heat exchanger and air filter and this in turn creates negative pressure in relation to the atmospheric pressure on the discharge side If there is
245. no drain trap then air will be drawn in from the drain pipe and the waste water splashed around giving rise to the risk of water overflowing from the drain pan To avoid this problem it is therefore necessary to design a trap which takes account of the maximum negative pressure which is likely to be created on the suction side 146 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 12 4 Example 4 Pressure down despite absence of leaks during air tight test all model Situation In order to carry out local air tight tests on the refrigerant piping the system was pressurized via the liquid pipe service port and after 24 hours the pressure was found to have fallen The local refrigerant piping alone does not lose any pressure Maybe the gas leak is supposed to be located in the indoor unit itself Source of The system was pressurized from the liquid pipe side and the gas pipes were therefore not pressurized Problem and The system was then left under pressure for 24 hours but during that time gas leaked through into the gas Remedial Action pipes due to internal leaks within electronic expansion valves and the gas pressure inside the liquid pipes consequently dropped Indoor unit Electronic i Filter expansion valve Filter Liquid pipe Gas pipe Pressure gauge Outdoor unit Nitrogen gas Main Points When carrying out air tight tests on local pipe
246. nstallation tools gauge manifold charge hose etc that are exclusively used for R410A installations to withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials e g mineral oils such as SUNISO and moisture from mixing into the system The screw specifications differ for R410A and R407C Vacuum pump use a 2 stage vacuum pump with a non return valve 1 Make sure the pump oil does not flow oppositely into the system while the pump is not working 2 Use a vacuum pump which can evacuate to 100 7 kPa 5Torr 755mmHg 6 1 Selection of Piping Material 1 Foreign materials inside pipes including oils for fabrication must be 30mg 10m or less 2 Use the following material specification for refrigerant pipping Construction material Phosphoric acid deoxidized seamless copper for refrigerant e Size Determine the proper size referring to chapter Example of connection e The wall thickness of the refrigerant piping should comply with relevant local and national regulations For R410A the design pressure is 3 8 MPa 3 Make sure to use the particular branches of piping that have been selected referring to chapter Example of connection Installation Manual 167 Refrigerant Piping Si39 303 6 2 Connecting the Refrigerant Piping 1 The local branch piping can be connected either forward or to the sides taken out of the bottom as shown in the figure 1 Left side connection 2 Front connection 3 Right side connection
247. ntact your Daikin dealer for details Only for Double flow Multi flow Corner Ceiling suspended and Wall mounted m Avoid operating in the horizontal direction L1 It may cause dew or dust to settle on the ceiling 210 Operation Manual Si39 303 Operation Procedure 6 4 Programming Start and Stop of the System with Timer m The timer is operated in the following two ways Programming the stop time The system stops operating after the set time has elapsed Programming the start time The system starts operating after the set time has elapsed W The timer can be programmed for a maximum of 72 hours m The start and the stop time can be simultaneously programmed RXYQ series REYQ series TEST Press the timer mode start stop button several times and select the mode on the display The display flashes e For setting the timer stop For setting the timer start ay Press the programming time button and set the time for stopping or starting the system Each time this button is pressed the time advances or goes backward by 1 hour Press the timer on off button The timer setting procedure ends The display O or G gt changes from flashing light to constant light il
248. nted Built in Type FXSQ M N Caution Drain Piping Rig the drain pipe as shown below and take measures against condensation Improperly rigged piping could lead to leaks and eventually wet furniture and belongings 1 Rig drain piping The diameter of the drain pipe should be greater than or equal to the diameter of the connecting pipe vinyl tube pipe size 25 mm outer dimension 32 mm Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1 100 to pre vent air pockets from forming e f the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope execute the drain raising piping To keep the drain hose from sagging space hanging wires every 1 to 1 5 m No Good Good Setting the unit at an angle opposite to the drain piping might cause leaks Use the attached drain hose and clamp metal Tighten the clamp firmly Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the white tape Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less than 4 mm from the hose Wrap the attached sealing pad over the clamp and drain hose to insulate Insulate the drain hose inside the building Clamp metal Large sealing pad attached attached Clamp metal I Tape White Drain hose PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING HOW TO INSTALL PIPING 1 Connect the drain hose to the drain raising pipes and insulate them 2 Connect the drain hose to the drain outlet
249. o revise the system design to dome extent or else take one of the following courses of action Action 1 Making openings which will allow the air to flow freely into the room Make openings above and below the door which are each equivalent in size to 0 15 or more of the floor area or make a doorless opening Action 2 Fit a mechanical ventilator linked to a gas leak detection alarm device 11 Action 2 Gas Indoor nit leak detection S alarm device 4 mechanical ventilator nL n Notes This precaution shows the requirement of EN Action 1 Make openings sufficiently large to permit free flow of air The precaution should be followed in accordance of local code 104 General Information Si39 303 Hand Over to Customer 6 Hand Over to Customer 6 1 Operational Steps Make final report Explain how to Hand over Complete test run test run m operate relevant printed inspection sheet equipment materials V1050 Important Points a The measurements taken during the test run should be recorded and kept on a test run inspection sheet b Do not forget to record the length of the refrigerant piping and the refrigerant additional charging volume on the plate on the back of the outdoor unit external notice board as this information will be required for servicing the system Explain to the cust
250. ocedure Adjusting the air flow direction 23 Fan only air conditioning selector switch Set the switch to for fan only operation or to for heating or cooling operation 24 Cool heat changeover switch Set the switch 104 for cooling or to 6 for heating operation m Incontradistinction to actual operating situations the display on figure 1 shows all possible indications m Ifthe filter sign lamp lights up clean the air filter as explained in the indoor unit manual After cleaning and reinstalling the air filter press the filter sign reset button on the remote controller The filter sign lamp on the display will go out W The remote controller BRC1A52 for FXS FXM FXL FXN does not have the display air flow flap 4 nor the air flow direction adjust button 22 204 Operation Manual Si39 303 Warning 4 Warning 4 1 Never Do the Following Never let the indoor unit or the remote controller get wet Do not wash the outdoor unit with water It may cause an electric shock or a fire Never use flammable spray such as hair spray lacquer or paint near the unit It may cause a fire Never touch the air outlet or the horizontal blades while the swing flap is in operation Fingers may become caught or the unit may break down Never replace a fuse with that of wrong ampere ratings or other wires when a fuse blows out Use of wire or copper wire may cause the unit to break down or cause a fire
251. omer how to operate the equipment and let him try it Assemble all the relevant diagrams and other printed matter which is required to operate the system and hand it all over to the customer on the spot and tell him to keep it List of equipment which has been delivered Contract drawings f It is essential to prepare a control wiring diagram which clarifies the refrigerant system and the control system 1 set of operation manuals Names of those responsible for the work emergency contact address Equipment guarantees V1143 e Make the service contact address clear System design materials Customer V1051 General Information 105 Appendix Si39 303 7 Appendix 7 1 Operating Noise of Indoor Units 7 1 1 Difference between Catalogue Data and Actual Noise Operating noise differs depending on the place of measurement room because of the various degrees with which the room reverberates the sound To determine the amount of reverberation under uniform conditions the unit has been measured in a dead room with results having been compiled in the below table The actual sound produced in unit operation can be determined from Table 1 Sound pressure rise due to room reverberation Higher than catalogue data 12 10 8 dB 6 B 4 2 0 30 50
252. on manual before using the air conditioner It will tell you how to use the unit properly and help you if any trouble occurs After reading the manual file it away for future reference Applicable model RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ8MY1B RXYQ10MY1B RXYQ12MY1B RXYQ14MY1B RXYQ16MY1B RXYQ18MY1B RXYQ20MY1B RXYQ22MY1B RXYQ24MY1B RXYQ26MY1B RXYQ28MY1B RXYQ30MY1B RXYQ32MY1B RXYQ34MY1B RXYQ36MY1B RXYQ38MY1B RXYQ40MY1B RXYQ42MY1B RXYQ44MY1B RXYQ46MY1B RXYQ48MY1B REYQ8MY1B REYQ10MY1B REYQ12MY1B REYQ14MY1B REYQ16MY1B REYQ18MY1B REYQ20MY1B REYQ22MY1B REYQ24MY1B REYQ26MY1B REYQ28MY1B REYQ30MY1B REYQ32MY1B REYQ34MY1B REYQ36MY1B REYQ38MY1B REYQ40MY1B REYQ42MY1B REYQ44MY1B REYQ46MY1B REYQ48MY1B 198 Operation Manual Si39 303 Safety Cautions 1 Safety Cautions Notes N Warning N Caution Read the following cautions carefully and use your equipment properly There are three kinds of safety cautions and tips listed here as follows N WARNING Improper handling can lead to such serious consequences as death or severe injury AN CAUTION Improper handling can lead to injury or damage It could also have serious consequences under certain conditions W These instructions will ensure proper use of the equipment Be sure to follow these important safety cautions Keep these warning sheets handy so that you can refer to them if needed Also if this equipment is transferred to a new user make s
253. on the indoor unit and tighten it with the clamp 3 Insulate both metal clamp and drain hose with the attached sealing pad Ceiling slab Z 1 1 5 Hanging bar A 300 or When canva ti en canvas duct is 350 530 1 Adjustable range 0 250mm When air inlet panel is 275 n 3 a directly installed Clamp Attached with unit 259 BIS TER installed Part to be procured Drain hose Attached with unit in the field If converging multiple drain pipes install according to the procedure shown below 8 Q1 l TL T joint converging drain pipes 3P086156 3A 9 Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit General Information 47 Installation Si39 303 2 After piping work is finished check drainage flows smoothly Open the water inlet lid add approximately 1000 cc of water gradually and check drainage flow Water inlet Portable pump Water inlet lid e Close Open Refrigerant pipes Drain outlet for maintenance with rubber plug Bucket Adding water from inspection opening Note Use this outlet to drain water from the drain pan WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED Check drainage flow d
254. ons of the control wiring correct Is the position of the remote controller clearly marked Have you checked the gradient of the drain piping Must be at least 1 100 oA Miscellaneous 9 1 9 5 052 2 Humidifying water supply pipe connection dips 0954 General Information 11 Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design Si39 303 2 4 2 Main Considerations in Preparation of Control Circuit Diagrams In addition to the design of the appropriate this system configuration it is also essential that the control system be made amply clear If the system is designed and installed without a clear comprehensive plan Step 1 Compiling a System List Note then problems are inevitably going to occur during the test run Servicing too will become much more time consuming than necessary However if control circuit diagrams are prepared along with the contract drawings in order to make the total system clearly visible then the essential points relating to the electrical connections will be easily understood the test run will go off without a hitch and the whole system will be rendered fully effective Q gt QO N Mark each outdoor unit with a code Add field settings and data for outdoor units and outdoor unit No if using sequential start Add the model number of each indoor unit connected to each refrigerant circuit Assign each indoor unit
255. ore rav 155 WOMB IN AOS aos dido u Tomaban aus q a 155 1 2 Standard Operation Limit etal eis 156 1 3 Standard Supplied Accessories 156 1 4 Option ACCESSO e edel QU 157 1 5 Technical Specifications 158 1 6 Electrical Specifications HRS OD HR i 160 2 Man Gomponellis ue e oce n eia ard 161 3 Selection of Location 162 4 Inspecting and Handling the Unit 164 5 Unpacking and Placing the Unit i t ete 165 6 ix oro ENS 167 Selection of Piping 167 gt Connecting the Refrigerant 168 6 3 Example of Connection duc pude tens 173 6 4 Leak test and Vacuum Drying 1 2 175 Pipe MAISUIANOM Men T 177 6 6 Additional refrigerant charge 178 TB VEIN 180 7 1 Optional Parts Cool Heat Selector 180 7 2 Power Circuit and Cable Requirements 181 723 eC 182 7 6 Examples ome tee
256. oren defe 160 Main EE IE E ETE 161 Selection of Location 162 Inspecting and Handling the Unit 164 Unpacking and Placing the Unit 165 digerere ES 167 6 1 Selection of Piping 2 167 6 2 Connecting the Refrigerant 168 6 3 Example of COnne contri nois i Pe HR 173 6 4 Leak test and Vacuum 175 6 5 Pipe amp Leiden eae 177 6 6 Additional refrigerant 178 Field AWIN G err 180 7 1 Optional Parts Cool Heat Selector 180 7 2 Power Circuit and Cable Requirements 181 713 General eme o t oA edet unas ditate tut 182 7 4 Examples c a CREE DUM KORR RI LENA 183 co tui occa don wt e ac elise eats 191 8 1 Checks Before Initial Start up 191 G2 Fest RUM EE 192 Caution for Refrigerant 1 222 2 4 2 194 9 1 Caution for Refrigerant 194 Part 3 Operation
257. ork by checking the foundation strength and levelness to avoid any occurrence of vibration and noise Fix the unit tightly with foundation bolts Prepare 4 sets of M12 foundation bolts with proper nuts and washers The proper length of the foundation bolts form the surface of the base is 20mm Install the unit securely in case of earthquake an typhoon cyclone hurricane or other strong wind The unit may topple or cause another accident if improperly set up m Make sure the unit is installed level on a sufficiently strong base to prevent vibration and noise W Secure the unit to its base using foundation bolts Use four commercially available M12 type foundation bolts nuts and washers The foundation bolts should be inserted 20 mm Make sure the base under the unit extended more than 765mm behind the unit The height of the base should be at least 150mm from the floor The unit must be installed on a solid longitudinal foundation steel beam frame or concrete as indicated in figure below 20 p Venu 5 a g 2 4 7 uh 3 1 Foundation bolt point 015 dia 4 positions 2 Depth of product 3 Shape of indoor unit s support leg and foundation bolt positions Model A B Q5 type 635 497 Q8 10 type 930 792 012 14 16 type 1240 1102 Do not use stands to support the corners Do not use stands to support the corners N Caution
258. outdoor units must be routed level or slightly upward to avoid the risk of oil detention to the piping side Pattern 1 O to indoor unit H cuj LIEU Piping between outdoor units to indoor unit Pattern 2 to indoor unit Piping between outdoor units to indoor unit ON Change to pattern 1 or pattern 2 peli he eee s l Prohibited pattern x Downward inclination to indoor unit 11 lg LIT to indoor unit j l Downward inclination j remains in piping Installation Manual 171 Refrigerant Piping Si39 303 2 To avoid the risk of oil retention to the stopping unit side always connect the shutoff valve and the piping between outdoor units as shown in the figure A or figure B x i x E Te qh UnitA Unit B Unit C Unit C
259. piping length 40m or less Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit 5m or less Allowable 50m or less Bi ees Outdoor Unit Indoor Unit when an outdoor unit is lower than indoor units 40m or less Indoor Unit Indoor Unit 15m or less General Information 109 Appendix Si39 303 7 3 Allowable Piping Length 7 3 1 Branch with refnet joint Maximum allowable length Allowable height length Allowable length after the branch Connection of 8 indoor units Heat pump system Branch with refnet joint Outdoor unit REFNET joint C One outdoor unit installed RXYQ5 16 Indoor units 1 8 t it REFNET joint A G First outdoor n H H3 Whenimultipie branch ce outdoor units installed TH RXYQ18 Eb fl PA Kl Cl mil s 1 2 3 4 5 6 Indoor units 1 8 f the system capacity is RXYQ18 or more re read to the first outdoor branch as seen from the indoor unit Between outdoor and indoor units Actual pipe length Pipe length between outdoor and indoor units 150m Example unit 8 a b c d e f g p lt 150m Equivalent length Equivalent pipe length between outdoor
260. puter Operation Manual 215 Following Symptoms are not Air Conditioner Troubles Si39 303 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 White Mist comes out of a Unit Indoor unit m When humidity is high during cooling operation If the interior of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated the temperature distribution inside a room becomes uneven It is necessary to clean the interior of the indoor unit Ask your Daikin dealer for details on cleaning the unit This operation requires a qualified service person m Immediately after the cooling operation stops and if the room temperature and humidity are low This is because warm refrigerant gas flows back into the indoor unit and generates steam Indoor unit outdoor unit When the system is changed over to heating operation after defrost operation Moisture generated by defrost becomes steam and is exhausted Noise of Air Conditioners Indoor unit m A zeen sound is heard immediately after the power supply is turned on The electronic expansion valve inside an indoor unit starts working and makes the noise Its volume will reduce in about one minute Acontinuous low shah sound is heard when the system is in cooling operation or at a stop When the drain pump optional accessories is in operation this noise is heard m A pishi pishi squeaking sound is heard when the system stops after heating operation Expansion and contraction of plastic parts caused by temperature change mak
261. r and report the malfunction code If the system does not properly operate except for the above mentioned cases and none of the above mentioned malfunctions is evident investigate the system according to the following procedures 1 If the system does not operate at all m Check if there is no power failure Wait until power is restored If power failure occurs during operation the system automatically restarts immediately after the power supply is recovered m Check if no fuse has blown or breaker has worked Change the fuse or reset the breaker if necessary 2 If the system goes into fan only operation but as soon as it goes into heating or cooling operation the system stops m Check if air inlet or outlet of outdoor or indoor unit is not blocked by obstacles Remove any obstacle and make it well ventilated m Check if the remote controller display shows time to clean the air filter Refer to the chapter Maintenance in the indoor unit manual 3 The system operates but cooling or heating is insufficient m Check if air inlet or outlet of outdoor or indoor unit is not blocked by obstacles Remove any obstacle and make it well ventilated Check if the air filter is not clogged Refer to the chapter Maintenance in the indoor unit manual Check the temperature setting Check the fan speed setting on your remote controller Check for open doors or windows Shut doors and windows to prevent wind from coming in Ch
262. r fan with 8 step or lower 25 Low noise setting Q o O o e Level 2 outdoor fan with 7 step or lower OR E E X XOL E Level 3 outdoor fan with 6 step or lower 090070 84 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation Setting item display No MODE TEST C H selection Low Demand Setting condition display Setting item 2 IND Master Slave noise H7P Hl H6P H3P H4P H5P 6 Factory set About 20 00 OR E E E E KO Night time low noise 26 operation start About 22 00 factory OK E E E JOR settin 9 About 24 00 About 6 00 OR E E E E FO Night time low noise 7 27 operation end setting O About 7 00 About 8 00 factory setting OR E E KOR 28 Power transistor OFF 09000000 check mode ON oeeeeoce Capacity OFF OK EEEE JOR 29 precedence setting O O O ON 60 demand OR E E E E FO 30 Demand setting 1 O O e 7096 demand OR K E X JOL 80 demand i OFF Continuous demand setting Fb SP le b ee 3 kap operation OFF 0900000 0 Master unit with 38 multi outdoor unit e system is inhibited to Master unit operation Inhibited e e e o e operate Emergenc opereton OFF OKE EEE JOR Slave unit 1 with 39 multi outdoor uni
263. r of connectable indoor units Select models so the total capacity of connected indoor units conforms to the specification General Information Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design Si39 303 2 Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design 2 1 Points Relating to the Performance of the Air Conditioning Units A number of points need to be borne in mind at the system design stage in order to ensure the mechanical efficiency of the air conditioning units m o Path of refrigerant piping between outdoor and indoor units height difference and pipe length Path of refrigerant piping should be determined such that length of piping is kept to a minimum Piping should be kept within permissible limits in terms of length and height difference Positioning of outdoor unit Position such that maintenance and repairs can be carried out leave room for servicing Avoid reduction of airflow and short circuiting V0948 T 0949 Positioning of indoor unit Position such that maintenance and repairs can be carried out inspection port positions and size check Avoid short circuiting Ensure sufficient drain pipe gradient need for drain up kit etc In the case of a ceiling mounted type make sure ceiling depth is sufficient need for high performance filter etc MEN V0951
264. r the power supply is turned on Wait one minute until the micro computer is prepared for operation 8 2 Cool Heat cannot be Changed Over m When the display shows changeover under control it shows that this is a slave remote controller When the cool heat changeover remote control switch is installed and the display shows changeover under control This is because cool heat changeover is controlled by the cool heat changeover remote control switch Ask your Daikin dealer where the remote control switch is installed 8 3 Fan Operation is Possible but Cooling and Heating do not Work m Immediately after the power is turned on The micro computer is getting ready to operate Wait 10 minutes 8 4 Fan Strength does not Correspond to the Setting W The fan strength does no change even if the fan strength adjustment button in pressed During heating operation when the room temperature reaches the set temperature the outdoor unit goes off and the indoor unit changes to whisper fan strength This is to prevent cold air blowing directly on occupants of the room The fan strength will not change even if the button is changed when another indoor unit is in heating operation 8 5 The Fan Direction does not Correspond to the Setting The fan direction does not correspond to the remote control display The fan direction does not swing This is because the unit is being controlled by the micro com
265. r whether or not there is outdoor outdoor unit wiring Set outdoor unit PC board 051 1 to indoor factory set Set cool heat switching to individual for Setting mode 1 factory set Q C H SELECT DEMAND ND MASTER SLAVE 2109000 HOP C H SELECT C H SELECT R C V3058 88 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation Set Cool Heat Separately for Each Outdoor Unit System by Cool Heat Switching Remote Controller It does not matter whether or not there is outdoor outdoor unit wiring Set outdoor unit PC board 051 1 to outdoor factory set Set cool heat switching to individual for Setting mode 1 factory set TESTY C H SELECT MODE wine IND IMASTERISLAVE L N O P DEMAND eo 70000 HIP H2P H6P C H SELECT C H SELECT R C oo OUT MULTI A B C FI FE2 F1 F2 QI Q Qs EF El O O O O select remote controller V3059 General Information 89 Test Operation Si39 303 Set Cool Heat for More Than One Outdoor Unit System Simultaneously in Accordance with Unified Master Outdoor Unit by Indoor Unit Remote Controller Install the outdoor unit ext
266. rain pipe must be fitted at a gradient of at least 1 100 The drain pipe should be as short as possible and free from airlocks T Gradient of at least 1 100 1cm 1m V1000 b Suspension bolts should be used to support long stretches of drain pipe in order to ensure that a gradient of 1 100 is maintained PVC pipes should not be bent Spacing of supports for horizontal piping Class Nominal diameter Spacing Rigid PVC pipe 25 40mm 1 1 5m c The length of pipe laid horizontally should be kept to a minimum Fit any indoor unit whose drain pipe connection is subjected to negative pressure with a drain trap FXYMP40 125 only a Rig the drain trap as shown in the drawing bellow b Provide one trap per unit A single trap for converging units will prove ineffective c Rig the trap to allow for future cleaning Indoor unit Indoor unit V1003 38 General Information Si39 303 Installation Grouped Drain 1 It is standard work practice to make connections to the main pipe from above The pipe down from the Piping combination should be as large as possible Grouped drain pipes from multiple units 25 300rmore Face piping downward Face the vent pipe mouth downward to keep foreign matter from penetrating the system Vent pipe V1004 2 The pipework should be kept as short as possible and the number of indoor units per group kept to
267. rmal operation check gt Remote controller displays an error Installation error Mon Remedial action The shutoff valve of an indoor E3 E4 Check referring to the table in 6 6 Additional unit is left closed UF Refrigerant Charge The phases of the power to Exchan ge two of the three phases L1 L2 L3 to make R units are U1 a positive phase connection No power is supplied to an Check if the power wiring for the outdoor units are connected correctly pacer uni Ud If the power wire is not connected to L2 phase no interru fon malfunction display will appear and the compressor will p not work Incorrect interconnections UF Check if the refrigerant line piping and the unit wiring between units are consistent with each other E3 Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and correct the refrigerant charge level by Refrigerant overcharge WE recovering any excessive refrigerant with a refrigerant recovery machine Check if the additional refrigerant charge has been E4 finished correctly Insufficient refrigerant F3 Recalculate the required amount of refrigerant from the piping length and add an adequate amount of refrigerant Temperature adjustment operation confirmation m After the test run is over operate the unit normally Heating is not possible if the outdoor temperature is 24 C or higher Make sure the indoor and outdoor units are operating normally
268. ross section Model A B 5HP RXYQ5MYIB 497 697 8 10HP RXYQ8 10MY1B 792 992 08 10 1 12 14 16HP IRXYO12 14 16MY1B REYQ12 14 16MY1B THOU SNO 3D040102A The proportions of cement sand gravel for the concrete shall be 1 2 4 and ten reinforcement bars that their diameter are 10mm approx 300mm intervals shall be placed The surface shall be finished with mortar The corner edges shall be chamfered When the foundation is built on a concrete floor rubble is not necessary However the surface of the section on which the foundation is built shall have rough finish A drain ditch shall be made around the foundation to thoroughly drain water from the equipment installation area When installing the equipment on a roof the floor strength shall be checked and water proofing measures shall be taken Y groove unnecessary for 5HP Models m Bolt pitch 491 Pitch of foundation bolt holes Z Foundation bolt hole RXYQ5MY1B RXYQ8 10MY1B RXYQ12 16MY1B 4 9 15 mn dia holes 4 6 15 mn dia holes 1102 4 15 mn dia holes Foundation bolt hole Pitch of foundation bolt holes ALLE bolt hole 192 Pitch of Foundation bolt holes 122 137 Pitch of foundation bolt holes General Information 59 Installation Si39 303 N Caution Unpacking and Placing the Unit W Caution in installation 1 Execute the installation w
269. ry setting is PM 10 00 Factory setting is 8 00 V3080 94 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation Setting of Demand Operation By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the outdoor unit external control adapter optional the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the compressor operating condition A When the demand operation is carried out by external instructions with the use of the outdoor unit external control adapter Set the External low noise Demand YES NO setting switch on the outdoor unit PCB to the External low noise Demand YES Set by Setting Mode 2 Set the Demand 1 level setting on the outdoor unit PCB as the need arises During the demand level 1 instruction the power consumption can be saved to 80 70 or 60 of the rated value respectively When the continuous demand operation is carried out Use of the outdoor unit external control adapter is not required Set the Continuous demand setting on the outdoor unit PCB If the Continuous demand setting is set to the Continuous demand 1 fixing set the Demand 1 setting on the outdoor unit PCB as the need arises During the continuous demand level 1 operation the power consumption can be saved to 80 70 or 60 of the rated value respectively General Information 95 Test Operation Si39 303 Image of operation in the case of A Power consumption 4
270. s Set when a blocking pad kit has been installed 3 Air flow direction adjustment Set at Equipped Not equipped installation of decoration panel 4 Field set air flow position setting Draft prevention Standard Ceiling Soiling prevention 5 Field set fan speed selection Standard Optional Optional fan speed control by air discharge accessory 1 accessory 2 outlet for phase control 15 25 Thermostat OFF excess humidity Not equipped Equipped 2 Direct duct connection Not equipped Equipped when the indoor unit and heat reclaim ventilation unit are connected by duct directly Note 6 3 Drain pump humidifier interlock Not equipped Equipped selection 5 Field set selection for individual Not equipped Equipped ventilation setting by remote controller 6 Field set selection for individual Not equipped Equipped ventilation setting by remote controller Notes 1 Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group however if you select the mode No inside parentheses you can also set by each individual unit Setting changes however cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses 2 The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers so they cannot be set individually Setting changes also cannot be checked 3 Marked are factory set 4 Do not make settings other than those described above Nothin
271. s in Special care is needed when the pipes are standing vertically outside Stored piping should also be covered Covering of pipe ends Through hole i 2 Outdoors V0970 General Information 19 Installation Si39 303 Refrigerant Pipe Flushing Flushing is a method of cleaning extraneous matter out of pipes using pressurized gas 3 major effects 1 Removal of oxidation bubbles formed inside copper pipes when nitrogen replacement is insufficient during soldering work 2 Removal of extraneous material and moisture from pipes when covering has been insufficient 3 Checks connections in pipes linking outdoor and indoor units Both liquid and gas pipes Example of procedure 1 Set pressure regulator on nitrogen cylinder gas used must be nitrogen There is a danger of condensation if fleon or carbon dioxide are used and oxygen carries the risk of explosions Pressure regulator Liquid pipe J Gas pipe Liquid pipe V0971 2 Connect the charge hose from the pressure regulator to the service port on the liquid pipe side of the outdoor unit 3 Fit blanking plugs to all indoor units B other than unit A Blanking plug brass Flare nut Z Copper pipe V0972 4 Open the main valve on the nitrogen cylinder and set the pressure regulator to 0 5MPa Primary Secondary Main valve Side side 0 5 MPa Pressure regulator V0973 5 Check that the nitrogen is p
272. s low noise level when the low noise signal is input 25 Low noise setting from outside 26 Sets starting time of nighttime low noise operation starting setting Nighttime low noise setting is also required 27 a Sets ending time of nighttime low noise operation ending setting Nighttime low noise setting is also required nr e Used for trouble diagnosis of DC compressor Since the 28 Check after waveform of inverter is output without wiring to the disconnection of COMPressor it is convenient to probe whether the trouble compressor wires comes from the compressor or PC board If the capacity control is required the low noise control is 29 io a settin automatically released by this setting during carrying out p 9 low noise operation and nighttime low noise operation Changes target value of power consumption when 30 Demand setting 1 demand control 1 is input Normally enables demand control 1 without external 32 Normal demand input Effective to prevent a problem that circuit breaker setting of small capacity is shut down due to large load 82 General Information Si39 303 Test Operation No Setting item Description 38 Emergency operation Setting for the master unit operation prohibition in multi outdoor unit system 39 Emergency operation Setting for the slave unit 1 operation prohibition in multi outdoor unit system 40 Emergen
273. s the same thickness do as shown in the figure below Power wire Round pressure terminal es It is forbidden to It is forbidden to thickness wiring connect two to connect wiring of to both sides one side different thicknesses Ck m For wiring use the designated power wire and connect firmly then secure to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the terminal board m Use appropriate screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws A screwdriver with a small head will strip the head and make proper tightening impossible m Over tightening the terminal screws may break them m See the table below for tightening torque for the terminal screws Tightening torque N m 8 Power terminal block M8 Ground MS Inter unit wiring terminal block 0 8 0 97 5 5 7 3 Precautions when connecting the ground When pulling the ground wire out wire it so that it comes through the cut out section of the cup washer An improper ground connection may prevent a good ground from being achieved Cup washer Installation Manual 185 Field Wiring Si39 303 Field line connection transmission wiring and cool heat selection In case of RXYQ5 16MY1B gt ow AIP gt JE Dr H 182 C H SELECTOR TO MULTI UNIT
274. set m Two remote controller control system Two remote controllers control one indoor unit in case of group control system one group of indoor units The unit is individually operated nm Notes Contact your Daikin dealer in case of changing the combination or setting of group control and two remote controller control systems Operation Manual 213 Optimum Operation Si39 303 7 Optimum Operation Observe the following precautions to ensure the system operates properly Adjust the air outlet properly and avoid direct air flow to room inhabitants m Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable environment Avoid excessive heating or cooling m Prevent direct sunlight from entering a room during cooling operation by using curtains or blinds m Ventilate often Extended use requires special attention to ventilation W Keep doors and windows closed If the doors and windows remain open air will flow out of your room causing a decrease in the cooling or heating effect m Never place objects near the air inlet or the air outlet of the unit It may cause deterioration in the effect or stop the operation W Turn off the main power supply switch to the unit when the unit is not used for longer periods of time If the switch is on it uses electricity Before restarting the unit turn on the main power supply switch 6 hours before operation to ensure smooth running Refer to the chapter Maintenance in the in
275. set in a metal framework The air suction and distribution grills should be positioned to take into account the possibility of short circuits Static pressure should be checked to ensure that the airflow is within the specified range The air filter must be easily detachable General Information 55 Installation Si39 303 3 2 12 Selection of Location This unit both indoor and outdoor is suitable for installation in a commercial and light industrial environment If installed as a household appliance it could cause electromagnetic interference The VRV OUTDOOR units should be installed in a location that meets the following requirements 1 2 AN Caution m The foundation is strong enough to support the weight of the unit and the floor is flat to prevent vibration and noise generation The space around the unit is adequate for servicing and the minimum space for air inlet and air outlet is available refer to figure below and choose one of both possibilities If installed asa single unit gt When installed in serial gt Pattern 1 1 gt 300 Pattern 1 I gt 300 1 1 ono 210 1210 gt 500 561220 1 a 2500 1 Front Side E 2 No limit to wall height P en 100 2 koi T 100 3 Suction side attern 2 gt attern 2 r gt 91910 gt 50 2100 250 111252
276. sible and slope it downwards so that air may not remaine trapped inside the pipe e Keep pipe size equal to or greater than that of the connecting pipe Vinyl pipe of 25 mm nominal diam and 32 mm outer diam Use the attached drain hose and clamp Tighten the clamp firmly Insulate the clamp metal with the attached sealing pad There is negative pressure inside the unit relative to atmospheric pressure when the unit is running so be sure to provide drain frap on the drain outlet See the figure In order to prevent foreign matter from building up inside the piping you should avoid curves as much as possible and arrange so the trap can be cleaned Clamp metal 100mm or more Attached with unit Attached drain hose Bottom of unit 5 cm or 5 cm or Large sealing pad Attached with unit Clamp metal Drain hose SS Drain hose E Note If installing central drain piping install according to the following right figure Install a drain trap for each indoor unit FXMQ200 250M e A drain pipe need not be installed e The diameter of the piping is the same as that of the connecting pipe PS1B and should be kept equal to or greater than that of the connecting pipe 2 After piping work is finished check drainage flows smoothly 3P080156 2 8 General Information 49 Installation Si39 303 Ceiling Rig the drain pipe as shown below and ta
277. sion margin of 0 to 0 5mm was provided for flaring For R410A air conditioners perform pipe flaring with a pipe extension margin of 1 0 to 1 5mm For clutch type only Conventional tool with pipe extension margin adjustment can be used 226 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 2 Torque wrench sP Specifications Dimension B Unit mm Nominal size Class 1 Class 2 Previous 1 2 24 26 24 5 8 27 29 27 No change in tightening torque No change in pipes of other sizes m Differences Change of dimension B Only 1 2 5 8 are extended For class 1 R407C For class 2 R410A Dimension B 3 Vacuum pump with check valve Vacuum pump adapter Reverse flow preventive vacuum adapter m Specifications Discharge speed e Maximum degree of vacuum 50 l min 5 2 100 7 5 torr 755 mmHg 60 l min 60Hz Suction port UNF7 16 20 1 4 Flare UNF 1 2 20 5 16 Flare with adapter m Differences Equipped with function to prevent reverse oil flow e Previous vacuum pump can be used by installing adapter Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 227 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 4 Leak tester Specifications Hydrogen detecting type etc Applicable refrigerants R410A R407C R404A R507A R134a etc Differences Previous testers detected chlori
278. stallation Manual 161 Selection of Location Si39 303 3 Selection of Location This unit both indoor and outdoor is suitable for installation in a commercial and light industrial environment If installed as a household appliance it could cause electromagnetic interference The VRV OUTDOOR units should be installed in a location that meets the following requirements 1 2 N Caution 1 The foundation is strong enough to support the weight of the unit and the floor is flat to prevent vibration and noise generation The space around the unit is adequate for servicing and the minimum space for air inlet and air outlet is available refer to figure below and choose one of both possibilities If installed as a single unit gt When installed in serial gt Pattern 1 gt 300 Pattern 1 2800 gt 10 210 4210 gt 500 T 22 1 E EN gt 500 1 Front Side era 2 No limit to wall height TEN ______ 3 Suction side Pattern 2 2100 Pattem2 7 I 2 Ol 1 1 gt 50 250 1 2100 mcis E78 Map isse 2500 af 2 T Pattern 3 2 Pattern 3 t 300 5 il num 9 1 3 1 i 8 210 1 2200 2400 1 2400 D There is no danger of fire due to leakage of inflammable gas Ensure that water cannot cause any damage to the loca
279. supply on Check the below items Power wiring Control transmission wiring between units Earth wire Check on refrigerant piping V Check on amount of refrigerant charge 4 1 2 Turn power on Turn outdoor unit power on Carry out field setting on outdoor PC board Turn indoor unit power on O Is the wiring performed as specified O Are the designated wires used O Is the grounding work completed Use a 500V megger tester to measure the insulation Do not use a megger tester for other circuits than 200V or 240v circuit O Are the setscrews of wiring not loose O Is pipe size proper The design pressure of this product is 3 8MPa O Are pipe insulation materials installed securely Liquid and gas pipes need to be insulated Otherwise causes water leak O Are respective stop valves on liquid gas and oil equalizing lines securely open O Is refrigerant charged up to the specified amount If insufficient charge the refrigerant from the service port of stop valve on the liquid side with outdoor unit in stop mode after turning power on O Has the amount of refrigerant charge been recorded on Record Chart of Additional Refrigerant Charge Amount son O Be sure to turn the power on 6 hours before starting operation to protect compressors to power on clankcase heater O For field settings refer to Field Settings on and after P95 After the completion of f
280. t do not use improper ampere fuses or do not use copper nor steel wires instead Do not place appliances which produce open fire in places exposed to the air flow from the unit or under the indoor unit It may cause incomplete combustion or deformation of the unit due to the heat Do not allow a child to mount on the outdoor unit or avoid placing any object on it Falling or tumbling may result in injury Never expose little children plants or animals directly to the air flow Adverse influence to little children animals and plants may result Do not wash the air conditioner with excessive water Electric shock or fire may result Do not install the air conditioner at any place where flammable gas may leak out If the gas leaks out and stays around the air conditioner a fire may break out In order to avoid electric shock or fire make sure that an earth leakage breaker is installed Be sure the air conditioner is electrically earthed In order to avoid electric shock make sure that the unit is grounded and that the earth wire is not connected to gas or water pipe lightning conductor or telephone earth wire Arrange the drain hose to ensure smooth drainage Incomplete drainage may cause wetting of the building furniture etc Do not let children play on and around the outdoor unit If they touch the unit carelessly it may result in injury Do not place a flower vase and anything containing water Water may enter the unit caus
281. t O O system is inhibited to Slave unit 1 operation Inhibited e e e e o e operate Emergenc OFF OK E E E E JOR Slave unit 2 with 40 multi outdoor unit O O system AMAN to Slave unit 2 operation Inhibited e e e e o e operate General Information 85 Test Operation Si39 303 c Monitor mode oM LED display To enter the monitor mode push the No Setting item Data display MODE button BS1 when in H1P H2P H3P H4P H5P H6P H7P Setting mode 1 Number of units for sequential 9 0 starting and others 4 See below 1 C H unified address o 2 Low noise demand address o o 3 Not used 9 4 Airnet address lt Selection of setting item gt Lower 6 digits 8 5 Number of connected indoor units D O O Push the SET button BS2 and set the LED display to a setting item 6 Number of connected BS units O Number of connected zone units excluding outdoor and BS unit 9 e e e 8 Number of outdoor units o e o 9 Number of connected BS units o ped 4 digits Lower 4 digits lt Confirmation on setting contents gt 19 Number ateonn
282. t damage during AN D transport RXYQ5 8 10 type RXYQ5 type RXYQ12 14 16 type 1 3 2 RXYQ12 14 16 type RXYQ8 10 type 1 Packaging material 2 Forklift 3 Opening Large 4 Belt sling 5 Opening Small 40x30 6 Wear plate 7 Removal of shipping brackets 8 Shipping bracket Remove the screws 58 General Information Si39 303 Installation 3 2 14 Installation of Outdoor Unit Notes N 6 Operational steps Prepare foundation Install outdoor unit V1150 Foundation bolt type JA Size 12 Nut Four bolts are required i Spring washer 3 thread ridges cp Q4 Frame NN y SN x B4 o 505 Ox N v 0 NS x x 8 5 LO 3 Z AN Drain ditch Smooth down grade of about 1 50 Foundation bolt executing method Loo A zl Y groove Except SIP Modeles Drain ditch Y B 9 When building When building I foundation on the Xe foundation on the 4 K d 100 50 ground concrete a PU Y Y H Led A 6 A Floor When installing multiple units in connection COCO X X c
283. t er e lenken 211 R REFNET Header eese 127 REFNET 128 148 HEFNET Joinit ntt tege 126 RHEFNET joint iot e n 128 REFNET T u u uu 148 Refrigerant Cylinders 224 Refrigerant 102 194 Refrigerant Pipe 17 S Selection of Location 56 162 Selection of Piping Material 167 Sequential 2 187 Setvice Space x ege ete cute 57 Service 0 225 Setting by dip switches 79 Setting by pushbutton switches 79 Setting Contents and Code No 70 Setting mode J marris 81 Setting mode 2 82 Setting of Low Noise Operation and Demand ODS Fat ON uec Re ee mo es 93 Setting of Refrigerant Additional Charging 99 Setting the Master Remote Controller 212 Signal interference due to use of multiple core 144 Simplified Remote Controller BRC2A51 69 Sleeve and Insert 15
284. t leakage Recommended method O O A Solder Burner Side facing Z77777 Upward facing V0978 Downward facing b Liquid and gas pipe branches should always be dealt with in the specified way with attention being paid to the direction of the fitting and its angle to prevent oil return or drift For example see page 148 It is standard working practice to use the nitrogen replacement method when brazing Important points 1 Every effort must be made to avoid fire Clean area where brazing is to be performed and make sure that fire fighting equipment and water are ready to hand 2 Be careful of burns 3 Make sure that the gap between the pipe and the joint is correct To prevent leaks 4 Is the pipe adequately supported m As a rule the gaps between supports for horizontal piping copper pipe are as follows Copper pipe support spacing From HASS 107 1977 Nominal diameter 20 or less 25 40 50 Maximum gap m 1 0 1 5 2 0 W The copper pipe should not be secured directly by metal brackets General Information 23 Installation Si39 303 Flare Connection a Stiffened pipe must always be annealed at least once prior to the flaring work b A pipe cutter must be used to cut the pipe A large pipe cutter must be used where the pipe has a large diameter When cutting a pipe which is too big for the pipe cutter a metal saw may be used but care must be taken to ensure
285. t system the system Amount of refrigerant with which the system is charged before leaving the factory Amount of refrigerant added locally in accordance with the length or diameter of the refrigerant piping m Notes Where a single refrigerant facility is divided onto 2 entirely independent refrigerant systems then use the amounts of refrigerant with which each separate system of charged 194 Installation Manual Si39 303 Caution for Refrigerant Leaks Step 2 Step 3 Calculate the smallest room volume m In a case like the following calculate the volume of a b as a single room or as the smallest room a Where there are no smaller room divisions O tdo or nit Indoor nit b Where there is a room division but there is an opening between the rooms sufficiently large to permit a free flow of air back and forth tdoor nit Indoor nit co Opening between rooms Partition Where there is an opening without a door or where there are openings above and below the door which are each equivalent in size to 0 15 or more of the floor area c Where there is a gas leak detection alarm device linked to a mechanical ventilator in the smallest room then the next smallest room will become the measurement target
286. tallation Manual Si39 303 Field Wiring N Caution sure to follow the limits below If the unit to unit cables are beyond these limits it may result in malfunction of transmission Maximum wiring length 1000m Total wiring length 2000m Max branches No of branches 16 Max number of outdoor units connectable 10 or less Up to 16 branches are possible for unit to unit cabling No branching is allowed after branching Max number of outdoor units connectable 10 or less Never connect the power supply to unit to unit cabling terminal block Otherwise the entire system may break down 1 Branch 2 Subbranch Sequential start Make the outdoor unit cable connections shown below The outdoor unit PC board A1P is factory set at Sequential start available Setting the cool heat operation heat pump unit only 1 Performing cool heat setting with the remote controller connected to the indoor unit Keep the cool heat selector switch DS1 on the outdoor unit PC board A1P at the factory setting position IN D UNIT TO IN D ON OFF B O 1234 N F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 Remote controller 2 Performing cool heat setting with the cool heat selector Connect the cool heat selector remote controller optional to the A B C terminals and set the cool heat selector switch DS1 on the outdoor unit PC board
287. tch type For R410A flare gauge is necessary Torque wrench Torque up for 1 2 and 5 8 Pipe cutter Pipe expander O Pipe bender O Pipe assembling oil x Due to refrigerating machine oil change No Suniso oil can be used Refrigerant recovery device Refrigerant piping Check your recovery device See the chart below Only 019 1 is changed to 1 2H material while the previous material is O As for the charge mouthpiece and packing 1 2UNF20 is necessary for mouthpiece size of charge hose m Copper tube material Outside Diameter mm Material 6 4 9 5 12 7 15 9 19 1 1 2H 22 2 1 2H 25 4 1 2H 28 6 1 2H 31 8 1 2H 34 9 1 2H 38 1 1 2H 41 3 1 2H O Soft Annealed H Hard Drawn Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A 225 Precautions for New Refrigerant R410A Si39 303 1 Flaring tool Flare gauge Specifications Dimension Unit mm 0 Tube O D 0 4 Do Class 2 R410A Class 1 Conventional 1 4 6 35 9 1 9 0 3 8 9 52 13 2 13 0 1 2 12 70 16 6 16 2 5 8 15 88 19 7 19 4 3 4 19 05 24 0 23 3 Nominal size Differences Change of dimension A Dimension A For class 1 R407C For class 2 R410A Conventional flaring tools can be used when the work process is changed change of work process Previously a pipe exten
288. te 206 Operation Manual Si39 303 Operation Procedure 6 Operation Procedure m Operation procedure varies according to the combination of outdoor unit and remote controller Read the chapter What to do before operation m To protect the unit turn on the main power switch 6 hours before operation m Ifthe main power supply is turned off during operation operation will restart automatically after the power turns back on again 6 1 Cooling Heating and Fan Only Operation m Changeover cannot be made with a remote controller whose display shows x 1 changeover under control m When the display changeover under control flashes refer to the chapter Operation procedure Setting the master remote controller Automatic operation can be selected only by REYQ series The fan may keep on running for about 1 minute after the heating operation stops The air flow rate may adjust itself depending on the room temperature or the fan may stop immediately This is not a malfunction For systems without cool heat changeover remote control switch RXYQ series REYQ series Press the operation mode selector button several times and select the operation mode of your choice Cooling operation 3 Hea
289. ted in accordance with following table W Size of Refrigerant Piping Outside Diameter mm Material 96 4 0 9 5 0 12 7 0 15 9 0 19 1 1 2H 22 2 1 2H 25 4 1 2H 28 6 1 2H 31 8 1 2H 34 9 1 2H 38 1 1 2H 41 3 1 2H The thickness and material shall be selected in accordance with local code b Brazed joints and special branches 1 General use L bend joint socket joint T joint etc W Joints must meet the requirements of the relevant JIS standard Size materials thickness etc 2 Special branches The Daikin outdoor unit multi connection kit REFNET joint REFNET header or Reducing socket should be used Example R410A RXYQ M Series REFNET joint REFNET header 4 branches 8 branches TTTT TT with heat insulation coating with heat insulation coating Gas pipe V0975 Refer detail of DAIKIN REFNET joint and REFNET header on page 126 General Information 21 Installation Si39 303 c Brazing The Multi System requires only copper copper jointing and the jointing method is explained below m The use of hard solder is essential Type Solder Soldering Breaking Soldering Jointing Example Flux Remarks JIS mark temperature strengh method distance for example C kg mm mm reference for product reference I name 735 Approx 0 05 Gas NEiS Not BCup rea
290. tep2 15 MPax5min 0 5 Stepl 0 3 MPa x 3 1321 3 mim General Information 29 Installation Si39 303 Checking for Leaks Check 1 Where pressure falls while carrying out Steps 1 to 3 described on previous page m Check by ear Listen for the sound of a major leak W Check by hand Check for leak by feeling around jointed sections with hand W Soap and water check Snoop Bubbles will reveal the presence of a leak Check 2 When searching for a minor leak or when there has been a fall in pressure while the system has been fully pressurized but the source of the leak cannot be traced 1 Release the nitrogen until the pressure reaches 0 3MPa 2 Increase pressure to 1 5MPa using gaseous flon gas R4104 Nitrogen and flon gas mixed 3 Search for the source of the leak using a leak detector 4 If the source of the leak still cannot be traced then repressurize with nitrogen up to 3 80MPa and check again The pressure must not be increased to more than 3 80MPa Setup of Air light Test As for the air tight test the setup of devices shown in the following figure is recommended with considerations given to vacuum drying and refrigerant additional charging which are operation steps following the air tightness test In order to conduct the air tight test with stop valves of 8 Gas side 10 liquid side and 15 Oil equalization piping and those of the refrigerant and vacuum pump all c
291. th Maintaining the following steps Nitrogen gas must be used Pressure Over a m Step 1 increase pressure to 0 3MPa for 3 Period minutes or more Indicates existence of major leaks m Step 2 increase pressure to 1 5MPa for minutes or more Indicates existence of minor leaks W Step 3 increase pressure to 3 80MPa for approx 24 hours Increasing the system pressure to 3 80MPa does not guarantee the identification of minor leaks if pressure is maintained for only a short time It is therefore recommended that the system remain pressurized in accordance with Step 3 above for at least 24 hours n Note The pressure must on no account be increased beyond 3 80MPa b Check for pressure drop If there is no drop in pressure then the test is deemed a success If the pressure drops then the leak must be located See following page However if there is a change in the ambient temperature between the pressurizing stage and the time when you check for a drop in pressure then you will have to adjust your calculations accordingly since a change of 1 C can account for a pressure change of approximately 0 01MPa Compensating adjustment value temperature at time of pressurizing temperature at time of checking x 0 01 Example Time of pressurizing 3 80MPa 25 C 24 hours later 3 75MPa 20 C The pressure drop in such a case is deemed to be zero successful test Step3 3 80MPax24hr 3 5 MPa 3 0 2 5 2 0 15 S
292. that the debris from sawing does not get into the pipe c Set the flaring tool to make sure the flare size remains within the prescribed limits A Nominal diameter External diameter of pipe d Pipe widening dimensions A 1 4 6 35 9 1 3 8 9 52 13 2 1 2 12 7 16 6 5 8 15 88 19 7 3 4 19 05 24 0 V0979 New Rank Compatible Flare Tool Compared to previous refrigerants the components of a HFC refrigerant is small R410A also has a higher pressure than other refrigerants Therefore in order to strengthen the intensity of the form and size of the flare section used for R410A class 2 apparatus unlike the specification of the conventional refrigerants it was set up with different standards When carrying out flare processing use a new rank compatible flare tool or a conventional flare tool Flare Gauge Adapter Corresponding to the New Rank When using the later use a flare gauge to take out the pipe from the gauge bar adjust it and then carry out the flare processing Size 12mmx72mm OS Thickness 1 0x0 5mm Each Ram Soz 24 Flare gauge 7 x 1 0 JAPAN Z L Size from the dice surface to the copper tip in mm eu wal Previous refrigerant R22 R407C etc R410A Name Eid de thi The conventional flare tool The conventional flare tool Clutch type Clutch type 1 4 6 35 0 8 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 3 8 9 52 0 8 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 1 2 12
293. the data transmission LED display Microcomputer Page ina Cooler heater changeover Default status operation Individual Bulk Bulk noise Demand Mult before delivery monitor parent child HAP HIP H3P H6P H7P One outdoor unit installed When multiple Master station outdoor unit Sub station 1 e e e e e installed Sub station 2 e e e e e e e LED display amp OFF ON Blinking The base parent unit is the outdoor unit to which the interconnecting wiring for the indoor units is connected The other outdoor units are child units 3 As necessary configure the system settings onsite by using the dipswitch DS1 on the outdoor unit P board A1P and push button switches BS1 to 5 When the system is in the multiple outdoor unit configuration Out Multi unit Any settings made on a child unit will be ignored Always perform configuration after turning ON the power To learn the setting method refer to the Service Precautions label attached at the position shown in the figure on the right Electric box lid in outdoor unit Remember the actual settings you have made must be recorded on the Service Precautions label 4 Check if the shutoff valves are in appropriate status and correct any wrong status Refer to t
294. the unit General Information 43 Installation Si39 303 N Caution 2 After piping work is finished check if drainage flows smoothly m Add approximately 2000 cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED m Check drainage flow during COOL running explained under TEST OPERATION WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED m Remove the terminal box lid connect a power supply and remote controller to the terminals Refer to the Installation Manual Next press the inspection test operation button on the remote controller The unit will engage the test operation mode Press the operation mode selector button until selecting FAN OPERATION m Then press the ON OFF button l The indoor unit fan and drain pump will start up Check that the water has brained from the unit Press to go back to the first mode m Note that the fan also starts rotating Attach the terminal box lid as before Drain pipe eem with rubber plug Use this outlet to drain water from the drain pan 2100 Plastic watering can Tube should be about 100 mm long Adding water through air discharge outlet Method of adding water Fig 24 Remote controller wiring cp Power supply wiring PI P2 F1 F2 T1 T2 HOR RRO CONTA WANG lid Remote controller wiring Pow
295. ting operation A Automatic operation e Fan only operation nm Notes Automatic operation REYQ only In this operation mode cool heat changeover is automatically conducted X Press the on off button The operation lamp lights up and the system starts operation For systems with cool heat changeover remote control switch Select operation mode with the cool heat changeover remote control switch as follows ae Cooling operation RXYQ series REYQ series VDAIKIN xum v h TT AIR CONDITIONE ER oc VDAIKIN um IE EDT a TS 81171 Operation Manual 207 Operation Procedure Si39 303 Notes Notes series VDAIKIN ie Heating operation Xx e Fan only operation RXYQ series VDAIKIN REYQ series VDAIKIN REYQ series VDAIKIN
296. tion direction Install so that the clamp metal does not contact the intake grill Wrap the attached sealing pad 8 over the clamp and drain hose to insulate Refer to Fig 23 No folding of drain hose inside the indoor unit Refer to Fig 24 If there is slack in the drain hose it may cause damage to the intake grill When drain hose is connected Clamp metal 2 attached EUR Good Wrong Do not lift Make sure there 2 Tilt down is no slack Taping area Drain hose 1 sure it is Gray attached not in the water Fig 22 Fig 21 Clamp metal 2 attached Sealing pad 8 attached Y lt 4 Sealing pad 8 Wrong attached Clamp metal 2 Fia 24 attached Length mm 9 Facing rear right or right gt Facing rear left or left gt Fig 23 50 General Information Si39 303 Installation 2 Confirm that smooth drainage is achieved after the piping work m Add 600 cc of water in the drain pan from the air outlet for confirming drainage Refer to Fig 25 Air outlet Pump used for kerosene stoves 3PN01417 5K 11 N Caution Drain piping connections Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger Wall Mounted
297. tion in case it drips out the unit e g in case of a blocked drain pipe The piping length between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit may not exceed the allowable piping length see Example of connection Select the location of the unit in such a way that neither the discharged air nor the sound generated by the unit disturb anyone Make sure that the air inlet and outlet of the unit are not positioned towards the main wind direction Frontal wind will disturb the operation of the unit If necessary use a windscreen to block the wind An inverter air conditioner may cause electronic noise generated from AM broadcasting Examine where to install the main air conditioner and electric wires keeping proper distances away from stereo equipment personal computers etc indoor unit Branch switch Branch switch remote I overcurrent breaker overcurrent breaker 3 8 controller x 119 selector S we N Z 21500 H personal computer Or JO Hs or radio I I me If the electric wave of AM broadcasting is particularly weak keep distances of 3m or more and use conduit tubes for power and transmission lines In heavy snowfall areas select an installation site where snow will not affect operation of the unit The refrigerant R410A
298. tions from the air conditioning work schedule 3 For sleeve and insert work the positions of ceiling girders should be confirmed and sleeve and insert requirement hole diameters positioning and numbers decided This is particularly important in the case of sleeves for drain piping 10 General Information Si39 303 Points to Bear in Mind at the System Design 2 4 Points to Bear in Mind when Preparing the Contract Drawings The following points should be borne in mind when preparing the contract drawings from the original drawings and the execution drawings The contract drawings for the air conditioning system are blueprints for the performance of the necessary work which are drawn up on the basis of the original drawings in such a way that a working balance is achieved between the specific requirements of each individual aspect of the work Contract Drawing Objectives include W The drawings should be easily comprehensible to those carrying out the work W The contents of the drawings should not be subject to subsequent alteration Contract drawing V0953 The following is a list of the main points to be considered when preparing contract drawings for the 47294711 System and should be used as a reference during this stage of the work 2 4 4 Atthe Contract Drawing Stage the Following Points are Critical Check points Arrangement of units 1 Have you left the access passages clear and allowed sufficient room
299. tions of the inserts must be decided early Positioning the Insert Example Steel insert securing molding box LN LOL UU U i NS V0959 Important point 1 The weight of the fitting to be suspended must be taken into account when choosing the insert General Information 15 Installation Si39 303 3 2 2 Installation of Indoor Unit W Operational steps Determine Mark installation Fit suspension _ gt installation gt position bolts m Fit indoor unit position V0960 Positioning 3 essential points when installing an indoor unit 1 Height Take care to account for final ceiling facing surface level 2 Level Level fitting is essential within x1 degree of horizontal 3 Direction The unit must be fitted in line with the ultimately visible ceiling joints O Leave a gap of at least 3cm leave pleanty of room Surface of ceiling facing x Surface of ceiling facing V0961 Important points The suspension bolts must be strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit Optional features must be added to the indoor unit prior to installation The model name should be checked prior to installation Take care to align the main unit correctly Bearing in mind piping layout and direction of blow out Leave sufficient space for servicing
300. tric box lid in the outdoor unit 1 Fully open the gas line shutoff valve liquid line shutoff valve and valve A above must be left fully closed and start the additional refrigerant charge operation 2 After the system is charged with a specified amount of refrigerant press the confirmation button BS3 on the P board A1P in the outdoor unit to stop the additional refrigerant charge operation 3 Immediately restore the shutoff valve to the following status Otherwise the piping may burst due to liquid seal Liquid line shutoff valve Gas line shutoff valve Oil equalizing line shutoff valve Close Default status before Open Open delivery Additional refrigerant charge procedure To learn the system settings for additional refrigerant charging refer to the Service Precaution label attached on the back of the electric box lid in the outdoor unit 1 Fully open the gas line shutoff valve oil equalizing line shutoff valve liquid line shutoff valve and valves A and B above must be left fully closed start the additional refrigerant charge operation 2 After the system is charged with a specified amount of refrigerant press the confirmation button BS3 on the P board A1P in the outdoor unit to stop the additional refrigerant charge operation 3 Immediately restore the shutoff valve to the following status Otherwise the piping may burst due to liquid seal Liquid line shutoff valve Gas line shutoff valve Oil equal
301. ty index Refrigerant branch kit name Number of outdoor units 2 unit 3 unit How to choose an outdoor branch kit needed if the outdoor unit capacity type is RXYQ18 or more Choose from the following table in accordance with the number of outdoor units Branch kit name BHFP22M90 BHFP22M90P BHFP22M135 BHFP22M135P lt 200 KHRP26M22T 200 lt x lt 290 KHRP26M33T 290 lt x lt 640 KHRP26M72T 640 KHRP26M73T KHRP73TP Example of downstream indoor units example in case of refnet joint C indoor units 3 4 5 6 7 8 example in case of refnet joint B indoor units 7 8 example in case of refnet header indoor units 1 2 3 4 5 6 example in the case of refnet header indoor units 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pipe size selection For an outdoor unit multi installation RXYQ18 48MY 1B make the settings in accordance with the following figure Lc Oil equalizing line part D Piping between outdoor unit and refrigerant branch kit part A Match to the size of the connection piping on the outdoor unit Outdoor unit connection piping size Piping size outer diameter x minimum thickness Liquid pipe Unit mm Outdoor unit capacity type Piping between outdoor branch and indoor unit part C Piping between outdoor branches part B Piping
302. unning 8 2 8 9 8 4 9 2 5 8 6 3 5 8 6 3 eee 8 2 8 9 A 2 7 7 8 4 7 7 8 4 7 8 8 5 current 5 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 44 48 57 624 57 62 8 2 8 9 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 5 9 vit vc 5 7 6 2 8 492 8 492 8 2 8 9 8 4 9 2 4 8 4 9 2 4 84 92 7272 PN 8 2 8 9 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 Voltage V 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 220 240 Control and Type Nominal fan motor running current A 1 1x2 1 1x2 1 1 0 7 2 1 1 0 7 2 0 7 1 1 2 0 7 1 1 2 Model RXYQ42MY1B RXYQ44MY1B RXYQ46MY1B RXYQ48MY1B Phase 3N 3N 3N 3N Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 Power supply Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 Voltage torerance 10 10 10 10 Recommended fuses A 100 100 110 110 Phase 3 3 3 3 Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 Voltage V 380 415 380 415 380 415 380 415 5862 7184 8289 5492 Compressor 7 62 29759 8289 8492 Nominal running A 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 2455 5755 current 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 84 9 2 84925 5 7 6 2 5 7 6 2 57 62 57 62 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 1 0 1 9 8492 8492 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 4 DENT x 8 4 9 2 8 4 9 2 Voltage V 220 24 220 240 220 240 220 240 Control Nominal fan motor running current 0 7 1 1 2 1 1x3 1 1x3 1 1x3 160 Installation Manual Si39 303 Main Components 2 Main Components For main components and function of the main components refer to the Engineering Data Book and the Service Manual Si39 302 In
303. unt the following 1 a Fragile handle the unit with care tt Keep the unit upright in order to avoid compressor damage Choose the path along which the unit is to be brought in ahead of time If a forklift it to be used pass the forklift arms through the large openings on the bottom of the unit Lift the unit preferably with a crane and 2 belts of at least 8m long When lifting the unit with a crane always use protectors to prevent belt damage and pay attention to the position of the unit s centre of gravity After installation remove the transport clasps attached to the large openings Bring the unit as close to its final installation position in its original package to prevent damage during transport RXYQ5 8 10 type RXYQ5 type RXYQ12 14 16 type RXYQ12 14 16 type RXYQ8 10 type 4 1 Packaging material 2 Forklift 3 Opening Large 4 Belt sling 5 Opening Small 40x30 6 Wear plate 7 Removal of shipping brackets 8 Shipping bracket Remove the screws 164 Installation Manual Si39 303 Unpacking and Placing the Unit 5 Unpacking and Placing the Unit m Make sure the unit is installed level on a sufficiently strong base to prevent vibration and noise m Secure the unit to its base using foundation bolts Use four commercially available M12 type foundation bolts nuts and washers m The fou
304. ure to hand over this user s manual to the new user m It is not good for your health to expose your body to the air flow for a long time m in order to avoid electric shock fire or injury or if you detect any abnormality such as smell of fire turn off power and call your dealer for instructions m Ask your dealer for installation of the air conditioner Incomplete installation performed by yourself may result in a water leakage electric shock and fire m Ask your dealer for improvement repair and maintenance Incomplete improvement repair and maintenance may result in a water leakage electric shock and fire Do not put a finger a rod or other objects into the air inlet or outlet As the fan is rotating at high speed it will cause injury m The refrigerant in the air conditioner is safe and normally does not leak If the refrigerant leaks inside the room the contact with a fire of a burner a heater or a cooker may result in a harmful gas Do not use the air conditioner until when a service person confirms to finish repairing the portion where the refrigerant leaks W Forrefrigerant leakage consult your dealer When the air conditioner is to be installed in a small room it is necessary to take proper measures so that the amount of any leaked refrigerant does not exceed the limiting concentration even when it leaks If the refrigerant leaks exceeding the level of limiting concentration an oxygen deficiency accident may h
305. uring COOL running explained under TEST OPERATION WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED Terminal board Remove the electric parts box lid connect a power supply and remote controller to the terminals Indoor Refer to the Installation Manuals PC board Next press the inspection test operation button 3 on the remote controller The unit will engage the test operation mode i Press the operation mode selector button until selecting ip QY OPERATION Then press the ON OFF button 5 The Electric parts box indoor unit fan and drain pump will start up Check that the water 220V 240V single ab h ly has drained from the unit Press to go back to the first mode a a You check whether drainage is satisfactory not by removing the access opening lid and checking the water level of the drain pan through the access opening Be careful when doing so because the fan is turning at the same time 3P086156 3A 10 48 General Information Si39 303 Installation Ceiling Mounted Duct Type FXMQ M Rig the drain pipe as shown below and take measures against condensation Improperly rigged piping could lead to leaks and eventually wet furniture and belongings Insulate the drain hose inside the buildings 1 Install the drain pipes FXMQ40 125M Keep piping as short as pos
306. using a remote controller connect the remote controller when setting the group No set the group No for centralized control and disconnect after making the setting W Set the group No after turning on the power supply for the central remote controller unified ON OFF controller and indoor unit BRC7C Type Group No setting by wireless remote controller for centralized control 1 When in the normal mode push 447 button for 4 seconds or more and operation then enters the field set mode Set mode No 00 with button Set the group No for each group with 4 Y button advance backward DOWN Enter the selected group numbers by pushing button Push 457 button and return to the normal mode RC7C Type oak MODE NO FIELD SET MODE 3 V0916 General Information 75 Test Operation Si39 303 Group No Setting Example 2 VN f N Centoral Remote troll Indoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Indoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Controller F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 Fi F2 F1 F2 77 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 2 1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 A H JL N 7 RC 1 00 Main Sub Group Contoller 1 01 1 02 autmatic unit address F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 2 1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 A H i JL A 77 77 No Remote Controller AG 1 03
307. ween the outdoor units is 90m or longer be sure to enlarge the main pipe the liquid side and gas side branch piping This does not apply to Q5 type Depending on the length of the refrigerant piping the power may drop but even in such cases it is ok to enlarge the main pipe 1 Outdoor unit 2 Main pipe 1 2 3 Enlarge Z 3 4 The first refrigerant branching kit 5 5 ndoor unit Gas side RXYQ5MY 1B type 15 9 5 619 1 Minimum thickness 1 00mm RXYQ8MY18B type 19 1 22 2 Minimum thickness 1 00mm RXYQ10MY1B type 22 2 25 4 Minimum thickness 1 00 RXYQ12 14MY1B type 628 6 Not Increased RXYQ16 22MY1B type 628 6 31 8 Minimum thickness 1 10 RXYQ24MY1B type 34 9 Not Increased RXYQ26 34MY1B type 634 9 638 1 Minimum thickness 1 10 RXYQ36 48MY 1B type 641 3 Not Increased Liquid side RXYQ5MY18B type 9 5 Not Increased RXYQ8 10MY1B type 9 5 012 7 Minimum thickness 0 80mm RXYQ12 16MY1B type 612 7 615 9 Minimum thickness 1 00mm RXYQ18 24MY1B type 615 9 619 1 Minimum thickness 1 00mm RXYQ26 48MY 1B type 619 1 622 2 Minimum thickness 1 00mm 170 Installation Manual Si39 303 Refrigerant Piping Cautions for installation of multiple outdoor units 1 The piping between the
308. work it is essential that the system be pressurized via both the liquid pipes and the gas pipes General Information 147 Appendix Si39 303 7 12 5 Example 5 Excessive noise due to incorrect angling of REFNET joints Situation The noise of the refrigerant flow during defrosting is excessive Source of The angle of the fittings was incorrect and needed to be rectified as shown in the following figure Problem and Remedial Action 1 REFNET joints The REFNET joints should be installed such that branches meet the main pipe either horizontally or vertically at an angle of exactly 90 degrees Horizontal fitting Horizontal line 30 degrees or less N Section seen from point A Vertical fitting Vertical na V1100 2 REFNET header The REFNET header is a lateral flow pipe and should be fitted so as to allow horizontal branch fittings Vertical or sloping fitting is not permissible Horizontal line Section seen from point B V1101 Main Points m Reasons for using refrigerant branch kit Fittings of REFNET joints or headers which are not carried out in strict accordance with the principles outlined here may result in complaints relating for example to poor performance of the system or noisy refrigerant flow To prevent unbalance flow or oil shortage 148 General Information Si39 303 Appendix 7 12 6 Example 6 Cracks develop in field pipes due to thermal exp
309. y Mode 3 than by Mode 2 2 Set Night time low noise start setting on the outdoor unit PC board as the need arises Set by Setting Mode 2 Since the time is presumed in accordance with the outdoor temperature the starting time is a target only 3 Set Night time low noise end setting on the outdoor unit PC board as the need arises Set by Setting Mode 2 Since the time is presumed in accordance with the outdoor temperature the ending time is a target only 4 Set Capacity precedence setting on the outdoor unit PC board as the need arises Set by Setting Mode 2 If set to ON when air conditioning load gets higher the status is switched to normal operation even at night General Information 93 Test Operation Si39 303 Image of operation in the case of A Operation sound Rated operation sound Operation sound of mode 1 Operation sound of mode 2 Operation sound of mode 3 A The power consumption be increased by about 10 Za Low noise of approx 3 to 5 ane power consumption ma cr d by ab 76 Low noise of approx 5 to 8 dB The power consumption may be increased by about 30 If capacity precedence is set in Capacity precedence setting the fan speed will be increased according to the load of air conditioning when load is heavier ER S EN 1 1 l Low noise mode instructing MENEE ERE oT

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

GAS VALVE USER MANUAL  Tripp Lite APSINT2424 User's Manual  Sony SA-VE815ED Satellite Radio User Manual  2．強風時、換気扇使用時の引違いサッシの笛鳴り現象  Avanity TROPICA-M24-AB Installation Guide  Guia do usuário - Zebra Technologies Corporation  notice pericalm - Brotteaux  Manual  EA 910 owner manual & parts list 05122013  55-10 Konfiguration des Fiery EX2101 auf Windows-Computer  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file